Anda di halaman 1dari 169

iManager M2000

V200R012

Basic Feature Description

Issue

03

Date

2012-07-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved.


No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions


and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or
representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address:

Huawei Industrial Base


Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

support@huawei.com

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Contents
1 Overview......................................................................................................................................... 1
2 Basic Features (WOFD-100000) ................................................................................................... 5
2.1 Platform............................................................................................................................................................ 5
2.2 Fault Management .......................................................................................................................................... 23
2.3 Configuration Management............................................................................................................................ 39
2.4 CME ............................................................................................................................................................... 51
2.5 Performance Management.............................................................................................................................. 83
2.6 Security Management ..................................................................................................................................... 90
2.7 Topology Management ................................................................................................................................. 104
2.8 NE License Management ............................................................................................................................. 107
2.9 Hardware and Software Management .......................................................................................................... 111
2.10 Network Monitoring and Analysis ............................................................................................................. 116
2.11 FARS .......................................................................................................................................................... 127
2.12 Base Station Commissioning Management ................................................................................................ 141
2.13 SingleRAN Management ........................................................................................................................... 149
2.14 Network Planning and Optimization .......................................................................................................... 157
2.15 Wireless Auxiliary Networking Devices .................................................................................................... 161

3 Acronyms and Abbreviations ................................................................................................. 163

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ii

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Overview

This document describes the basic features provided by Huawei M2000 V200R012. This
document helps users understand the M2000 features.
The network elements (NEs) in this document refer to the network devices managed by the
M2000. The M2000 manages Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA), Global
System for Mobile Communications (GSM), SingleRAN, Long Term Evolution (LTE),
information management system (IMS), and UMTS Broadband (uBro) NEs, transmission
devices, IP devices, and other devices such as domain name servers (DNSs) and Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP) servers. Unless otherwise specified, all the devices described
in this document are Huawei products.
By default, SingleRAN is managed by one M2000 system.

The solutions used with M2000 V200R012 include GBSS14.0, RAN14.0, eRAN3.0,
SingleRAN7.0, CS9.2, PS9.1, SingleSDB3.3, IMS9.0, NGN10.6, and signaling transfer point
(STP). The new and enhanced features in M2000 V200R012 are available only when M2000
V200R012 works with a corresponding solution.
The M2000 manages the following WRAN NEs:
Base station: NodeBV1, including the base station types of BTS3812, BTS3806,
BTS3806A, BTS3812E, BTS3812AE, BTS3812A, and DBS3800
Base station: NodeBV2, including the base station types of DBS3900 WCDMA, BTS3900
WCDMA, BTS3900A WCDMA, BTS3900L WCDMA, and BTS3900AL WCDMA
Micro base station: BTS3902E WCDMA
Radio network controller: BSC6800
Multimode base station controller: BSC6900 UMTS
Clock server: IP Clock Server
The M2000 manages the following GBSS NEs:
Base station controller: BSC6000 (GSM-R)
Multimode base station controller: BSC6900 GSM
Base station: GBTS (GSM BTSs except BTS3900B and BTS3900E)
Pico BTS: BTS3900B
Compact BTS: BTS3900E
Clock server: IP Clock Server

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

The M2000 manages the following core network (CN) NEs:


Serving GPRS support node: SGSN
Gateway GPRS support node: GGSN
Report server: SUR
Mobile switching center server: MSC Server
Home location register: HLR9820
Home location register (service node): HLR-FE
Media gateway: MGW
Fixed-mobile convergence media gateway: FMC MGW
Charging gateway: CG
Signaling gateway: SG7000
Interworking function: IWF
Enhanced name server: ENS
Unified number portability: UNP
Unified identity management: UIM
Unified equipment identity register: UEIR
Unified Subscriber Center Database: USCDB
Visual IP
Security immunity gateway: SIG
Embedded Edge Router: EER
SigProbe
SigProbeTDM
The M2000 manages the following SingleRAN NEs:
Multimode base station controller (GU mode): BSC6900 GU
Multimode base station: MBTS(GU), MBTS(GL), MBTS(UL), MBTS(GUL), and
MBTS(WL)
The M2000 manages the following uBro NEs:
Access point: AP (The AP Manager forwards AP alarm and performance data to the
M2000.)
Operations support system (OSS) of AP: AP Manager
AP wireless gateway: AG
AP home register: AHR
Authentication, Authorization and Accounting: AAA
Clock server: IP Clock Server
Security gateway: IPSec GW, including Eudemon1000E, and Eudemon8000E
(Eudemon8080E)
The M2000 manages the following eRAN NEs:
Base station: eNodeB, including DBS3900 LTE, BTS3900 LTE, BTS3900A LTE,
BTS3900L LTE, and BTS3900AL LTE
Micro base station: BTS3202E
Universal switching unit: USU

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Wireless backhaul system: eRelay, including eRelay BS and eRelay Remote Node (RRN)
Clock server: IP Clock Server
The M2000 manages the following evolved packet core (EPC) NEs:
Home subscriber server: SAE-HSS
Unified service node: USN
Unified gateway: UGW
Charging gateway: CG
Unified policy and charging controller: UPCC
Signaling service processing system: SPSV3
The M2000 manages the following IMS NEs:
Media gateway: MGW
Session border controller: SBC (SE2300, SE2600)
Home subscriber server: HSS (HSS9820)
Call session control function: CSCF (CSC3300)
Unified policy and charging controller: UPCC
Charging collection function: CCF (iCG9815)
Advanced telephony server: ATS (ATS9900)
Multimedia exchange server: MediaX (MediaX3600)
Multimedia resource function processor: MRFP (MRP6600)
Unified Subscriber Center Database: USCDB
Attachment information management system: AIM (AIM6300)
Service provisioning gateway: SPG (SPG2800)
Unified gateway controller: UGC (UGC3200)
E.164 number: ENUM
Convergent Application Server: CAS9910
Presence server, Group server, Messaging server: PGM
Enhanced name server: ENS
Multipoint control unit: ViewPoint
Open service gateway: OSG
Access gateway control function: AGCF (UAC3000)
Rich Communication Suite: RCS (RCS9100)
Terminal management system: TMS9950
Network recording&playback server: MediaX3600NRS (NRS2000)
The M2000 manages the following signaling transfer point (STP) NEs:
Convergent Application Server: CAS9910
Signaling service processing system: SPS
Signaling gateway: SG7000
The M2000 manages the following next generation network (NGN) NEs:
Softswitch system: SoftX3000
Media gateway: MGW

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Signaling gateway: SG7000


Signaling service processing system: SPS
Media switch server: MediaX3600
Session border controller: SE2300/SE2600
Media resource server: MRS6100
iGateWay Bill: iGWB
Signaling transfer point: STP
Smart home location register: SHLR (SHLR9200)
Convergent Application Server: CAS9910
The M2000 manages the following wireless transmission devices:
Optical transmission devices: Metro1000V3 and OSN3500
Microwave transmission devices: RTN620, RTN605, RTN910, RTN950, and RTN980
Building integrated timing supply system: BITS
The M2000 manages the following IP devices:
S series switches:
S9300: S9303, S9306, and S9312
S8500: S8505, S8512
S5624P: S5624P and S5624
S5000: S5000
S3900: S3928P-EI
S3500: S3526C-24[12FS], S3526C-24[12FM], S3526C, S3552G, S3552P, S3528G,
S3528P, S3538G, and S3528P-EA
S5300: S5328TP-EI-24S, S5328TP-EI/SI, S5328C-EI-24S, S5328C-EI, S5352C-EI,
S5352TP-EI-48S
S3300: S3328TP-EI, S3328TP-SI, S3328TP-EI-24S, S3352P-SI, S3352P-EI-24S,
S3352P-EI-48S
NE08 series routers
NE08: NE08 and NE08E
NE16: NE16 and NE16E
NE20: NE20E
NE40: NE40-2, NE40-4, NE40-8, and NE40-E
NE80: NE80
AR46 series routers
AR4640
Eudemon series firewalls
Eudemon200, Eudemon300, Eudemon500, Eudemon1000, and Eudemon8000
Other devices that can be managed by the M2000 are as follows:
DNS (including third-party DNSs)
DHCP server (including third-party DHCP servers)
NE bearing server: servers that bear the SG7000, MSC Server, and iGWB
Wi-Fi device: Skyway Excel XL5810, which is from a third-party system

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Basic Features (WOFD-100000)

2.1 Platform
WOFD-000100 Basic M2000 Service
Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R003.

Summary
This feature provides hardware and software platforms and basic functions required for the
proper operation of the M2000. Basic functions include system operating-status monitoring,
online help, and remote maintenance.

Benefits
The M2000 centrally manages WCDMA, GSM, LTE, and SingleRAN networks. Based on
common software and hardware platforms, the M2000 provides various network management
application services such as alarm, performance, security, and configuration management.
These functions improve the M2000's working efficiency, reduce operation and maintenance
(O&M) costs, and therefore minimize telecom operators' investments.

Description
This feature provides the following functions:
Hardware and software platforms
For details about the hardware and software platforms, see iManager M2000 V200R012
Product Description.
M2000 software integrity check
This function ensures the accuracy and integrity of the M2000 software when it is being
installed on the live network. When releasing an M2000 software version, the M2000 uses
a digital certificate to sign the software version. Before installing or upgrading the M2000
software, the M2000 verifies the digital certificate of the software. If the digital certificate
passes the verification, the M2000 proceeds with the installation or upgrade. Otherwise,
the M2000 provides information about the verification failure.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Online help
The M2000 provides online help information that supports functions such as hotspot help,
full-text search, and offline browse. Online help includes the following items:

Description of M2000 functions such as fault, configuration, performance, security,


and topology management, and how to implement these functions

Description of valid value ranges for MML command parameters

Details about configuration parameters, alarms, and performance counters

Users can switch to Help information about the MML commands, alarms, performance
counters, and configuration objects and parameters from the command-line interface
(CLI), alarm, performance, and configuration management windows.
Users can create, edit, and delete, and manage remarks on any Help page. Remarks
management functions include querying, importing, and exporting.
M2000 status monitoring
This function monitors the M2000, database, and hardware status, and performance
counters in real time.

System status information that can be monitored includes the server, service and
process status, database and disk partition space, and component information. The
M2000 allows users to set thresholds for system status. If a counter value exceeds the
user-specified threshold, the M2000 generates an alarm. If the counter value returns to
the valid range, the M2000 clears the alarm.

The parts of the system that can be monitored include disks, CPUs, memory, disk
arrays, power supplies, fans, network ports, and environments. When a fault occurs on
the hardware, the system generates an alarm. This function does not apply to the ATAE
cluster solution.

After being started, the M2000 automatically collects its own performance statistics,
including the average and peak usage of the server processor, server memory, server
partitions, and database space. The M2000 allows users to query the M2000
performance statistics based on time ranges.

M2000 license management


The M2000 license defines the M2000's management capability on the network. The
M2000 provides specific network resource management capacity and optional features
under license control.
The M2000 license control items consist of function control items and resource control
items. Users can view the function authorization information, update the license file, and
export license information to a CSV or XLS file.

Function control items: authorized optional M2000 features controlled on the basis of
functions.

Resource control items: authorized M2000 features that are controlled by the number
of resources, manageable resource capacities, and number of used resources of these
features. The M2000 generates an alarm if the number of network resources managed
by a resource control item exceeds the number specified by the license. Users can
manually clear this alarm.

Invalidating a license
The M2000 allows users to invalidate a license on the client and generates an invalid code.
According to the invalid code, Huawei technical support personnel apply for a new license.
This significantly improves the efficiency of updating licenses in cases such as expansion,
incremental sales, electronic serial number (ESN) replacement, and version upgrade.
Concurrent M2000 clients

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

The M2000 supports multiple concurrent clients. The number of concurrent clients that the
M2000 can manage depends on the hardware configuration of the M2000 server. An
M2000 single-server system supports up to 100 concurrent clients, and a multi-server
load-sharing (SLS) system supports up to 120 concurrent clients.
Remote maintenance
Users can connect the M2000 client to the M2000 server for remote maintenance through
dial-up or a virtual private network (VPN). Remote maintenance through dial-up requires
a dial-up server. Remote maintenance through a VPN requires a VPN gateway.
Web-based installation and automatic upgrade of the M2000 client
Users can install the M2000 client locally or remotely through a web browser.
In the case of remote web-based installation, users can log in to the M2000 server through
a web browser and install the M2000 client.
The M2000 supports automatic upgrades of the M2000 client. If the version of the M2000
client is inconsistent with the server version when users log in, the M2000 automatically
updates the client software to the matching version according to the user confirmation.
This improves the efficiency in changing client versions and reduces maintenance costs.
Dynamic adaption of new NE version
The M2000 provides the mediation solution to match multiple NE versions. Therefore, to
manage a new NE version, users only need to install the mediation of the NE without
upgrading the M2000.
During the mediation installation, the M2000 can provide network management services
properly. The installation of mediation does not affect the online users who do not require
the mediation version. Users who require the new mediation need log in to the client again
to use the latest mediation version.
In scenarios such as initial site deployment and network upgrade, multiple mediations
need to be loaded at a time. The M2000 can load NE mediations in batches, reducing the
loading time and improving efficiency.
Online user monitoring
The M2000 monitors the session status and operations performed by all M2000 users. The
user-session monitoring can display information such as user name, maintenance terminal
IP address, user type, session start time, and user group. The user-operation monitoring
can display information such as user name, maintenance terminal IP address, security
operation, operation object, risk level, and execution result. With this function,
administrators can force a specified user to log out.
Workbench management
The M2000 provides a workbench for function and application shortcuts. Users can create
function and application shortcuts on the workbench, which simplifies operations and
improves operation efficiency. Users can also customize the names, description, and icons
of workbench shortcuts. The M2000 provides default workbench shortcuts to certain
functions such as centralized MML CLI, centralized task management, system monitoring,
and topology management.
Southbound and northbound subnet separation
To enhance network security, the M2000 now separates southbound and northbound
interfaces by configuring IP addresses belonging to different subnets. This ensures that
these interfaces are deployed in different subnets. The southbound subnet connects NEs
and the M2000 and the northbound subnet connects the M2000 client and a third-party
system.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R012C00:
Southbound and northbound subnet separation: This solution is supported by
Sun-platform-based single-server, local HA, remote HA, SLS, and emergency systems.
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R011C00:
Monitoring M2000 hardware based on HP platform
Dynamically loading NE mediations in batches
Running M2000 clients on the Windows 7 operating system
Verifying M2000 software integrity
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R010:
Associating alarm, performance, and configuration management and centralized
command configuration functions with related Help information: Only the NodeB,
BSC6900 GU, BSC6900 GSM, and BSC6900 UMTS support the function of associating
performance counters with related Help information.
Creating and managing remarks in a Help window
Invalidating licenses
Monitoring the operating status of the Sybase database
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R009:
Verifying M2000 services after the M2000 is upgraded
Supporting Windows Vista and XP operating systems
Managing functions and applications using a workspace
Updating M2000 license files on the client
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R008:
Collecting M2000 performance statistics
Installing and automatically upgrading M2000 clients on a web browser
Loading M2000 mediation versions online
Supporting HP and ATAE platforms

WOFD-000200 File Transfer Management


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R003.

Summary
The M2000 supports file transfer between the M2000 server and the M2000 client, between the
M2000 and NEs, and between the M2000 and a third-party system by using File Transfer
Protocol (FTP).
To ensure data transmission security, the M2000 supports FTPS- and SFTP-based file transfer.
For details, see the optional feature WOFD-210100 Encrypted Transmission.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Benefits
This feature ensures the effective transfer of files between the M2000 server and the M2000
client, between the M2000 and NEs, and between the M2000 and a third-party system.

Description
FTP is a standard protocol, which specifies that file transfer between network nodes can be
implemented by setting up control channels and data transfer channels. Complying with the
RFC 959 FTP standard protocol, the M2000 supports file transfer and management. It transfers
files between the M2000 server and the M2000 client, between the M2000 and NEs, and
between the M2000 and a third-party system. The data to be transferred is as follows:
Performance data, log, and configuration data files collected from NEs or sent to a
third-party system by the M2000
NE version, configuration data, and patch files downloaded from the M2000 by NEs
License and NE version files transferred between the M2000 client and server
According to the application scenarios, the M2000 can function as an FTP server or client. For
example, when transferring files to a third-party system, the M2000 can be either an FTP server
or client based on user requirements. When upgrading NEs, users need to upload the software
version from the M2000 client to the M2000 server. In such a case, the M2000 server functions
as an FTP server, while the M2000 client functions as an FTP client.
The M2000 manages parameters related to file transfer. For example, it allows users to set file
transfer between NEs and the M2000 server and between the M2000 client and server, disable
plaintext transfer, and set a relay server and a third-party FTP server.
Generally, FTP and File Transfer Protocol over SSL (FTPS) use default service ports, which
may cause security risks. To improve system security, the M2000 allows users to customize
FTP and FTPS service ports.

Enhancement
The function of customizing FTP and FTPS service ports is added to M2000 V200R012C00.

Dependency
None

WOFD-000300 Application Management Platform


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R008.

Summary
The application management platform supports centralized management of iSStar script
applications and other applications. The iSStar is an enhanced script development platform
provided by the M2000. With the application management platform, the M2000 manages
application shortcuts by category and manages iSStar script applications.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

The iSStar script applications are classified into local script applications and remote script
applications. Local script application files are stored and executed on the M2000 client. Remote
script application files are stored and executed on the M2000 server.

Benefits
This feature brings about the following benefits:
Using this feature, users do not need to pay attention to the implementation of the iSStar
script. After the script is released, users can run it and obtain the execution results through
the shortcut on the application management platform.
The application management platform can also manage other applications to implement
the uniform management of scripts and other applications.

Description
The application management platform is used to manage the iSStar and other applications. This
feature allows users to categorize application shortcuts and manage the remote iSStar
applications, including management for workspaces, application shortcuts, remote applications,
and iSStar tasks.
Workspace management
A workspace is a management platform for categorizing application shortcuts. The
applications of the same category can be managed by one workspace. Users can categorize
applications based on their preferences and manage these applications on different
workspaces. Users can create or delete workspaces and change the workspace names.
Remote application management
The application management platform allows users to manage remote iSStar script
applications, such as viewing, issuing, downloading, and deleting the applications.
Management of application shortcuts
Users can create, delete, and copy shortcuts. They can also modify the attributes of the
shortcuts. In addition, users can create shortcuts to both local and remote iSStar script
applications. When using the shortcuts of iSStar script applications, users can select
multiple NEs at a time to create script tasks in batches.
Task management
The M2000 provides a GUI for managing local and remote iSStar script tasks, including
tasks started through application shortcuts or through the iSStar development platform.
Users can check task information such as script file path and name, NE, progress, start
time, end time, status, task creator, and IP address of the client where a local task is
executed. Users can also create, copy, start, suspend, or resume a task, delete tasks in
batches, and check task execution results.

WOFD-000700 ATAE Cluster Solution


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R010.

Summary
The advanced telecommunications application environment (ATAE) cluster solution is an
integrated OSS solution developed on the Huawei ATAE platform.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

The characteristics of the ATAE cluster solution are as follows:


Highly professional
Highly integrated
Carrier-class reliability
High performance
Enables smooth expansion through board insertion
In addition, the ATAE cluster solution centrally implements the following functions:
Managing large-scale networks
Monitoring and maintaining hardware
Holding multiple OSS products such as the M2000 (including the Trace Server), PRS, and
Nastar (including the eSAU, which is short for evolved service aware unit)
These features of the ATAE cluster solution help telecom operators minimize energy
consumption, save equipment room space, reduce overall deployment costs, and improve
competitiveness.
The Trace Server is a dedicated server provided by the M2000 for LTE tracing services. This server stores
LTE UE and cell tracing data. The eSAU is a server provided by the Nastar for preprocessing data reported
from NEs, such as measurement reports (MRs).

Benefits
This feature brings about the following benefits:
An ATAE subrack contains 14 boards, where 12 boards function as servers and 2 boards
function as switching boards. Compared with traditional servers that provide equivalent
management capability, the ATAE cluster solution reduces energy consumption by over
60%, saves equipment room space by 50%, and reduces the number of cables for
connecting servers.
The ATAE cluster solution helps improve O&M efficiency and minimize O&M costs
because it can centrally manage large-scale networks. For example, a single ATAE cabinet
can hold an M2000 system, the PRS, and the Nastar at the same time.
The ATAE cluster solution provides carrier-class reliability and ensures that services run
smoothly all the time. In an ATAE cabinet, the key function modules such as subrack
power supply units, fans, subrack management units, and switching units adopt the
redundancy design, which provides carrier-class high reliability for telecom operators.
The ATAE cluster solution adopts the N:1 redundancy solution, which improves hardware
usage.
ATAE cluster solution supports board plug-and-play by using the SAN boot technology to
re-load software automatically. Therefore, services can be quickly restored when a fault
occurs.
The ATAE cluster solution provides the OSS self-maintenance unit (OSMU), which helps
telecom operators improve O&M efficiency.

Description
This feature is described as follows:
Hardware configuration

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

An ATAE cabinet consists of 1 or 2 subracks, which can hold the M2000, PRS, and Nastar
concurrently. The ATAE cluster solution provides flexible integrated deployment
solutions for different network scales and scenarios. For example, integrated deployment
of the M2000 and Trace Server for the LTE network and integrated deployment of the
M2000, PRS, and Nastar for GSM and UMTS networks.
Carrier-class reliability

Software redundancy: The boards in the ATAE cluster solution are classified into
server, switching, and DB boards. Server and DB boards support N:1 redundancy. The
server boards implement different functions by loading corresponding software. One
OSS product can be deployed on multiple server boards, and the boards are grouped
into a cluster that adopts N:1 redundancy. DB boards implement data storage by
loading corresponding database software. The DB board architectures for all OSS
products are similar. Therefore, these DB boards share only one standby board.

Hardware redundancy: The key function modules in an ATAE subrack adopt the
redundancy design. When the active module is faulty, services are immediately
switched over to the standby module.
a.

The power supply units, subrack management units, switching units, and fans of
the ATAE subrack adopt the redundancy design.

b. The service bus of the ATAE subrack adopts dual-star redundancy.


c.

The service plane and the management plane are deployed on different boards. In
this manner, the impact on services is minimized.

d. The main storage system adopts the RAID 1+0 and backup storage system adopts
RAID 5 to protect data.
e.

The controllers and power supply units in the storage system adopt the redundancy
design.

Smooth expansion

In the ATAE cluster solution, services are classified into different types and are
deployed on corresponding boards. Therefore, users can smoothly expand the system
capacity by inserting boards.

The ATAE cluster solution adopts the storage area network (SAN) architecture, which
allows for the smooth expansion of storage devices. For example, users can expand
storage capacity by adding disk arrays or a storage cabinet.

Board plug-and-play
In the ATAE cluster solution, only the OSMU is configured with hard disks, and other
boards adopt the SAN Boot technology. With the SAN Boot technology, users can start the
operating system from the disk arrays. When a board is faulty, the boot volume is mapped
on a new board that replaces the faulty one. Therefore, the SAN Boot technology helps
quickly rectify faults.
OSMU
The OSMU is the O&M unit of the ATAE cluster solution. It provides centralized
maintenance and management for the ATAE cluster system. The OSMU is deployed on an
independent board, supporting functions such as device, software, and service
management, OSMU maintenance, and data backup.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

The device management function supports one-click installation and configuration of


the operating system, database, and Veritas Cluster Server (VCS). This function allows
users to monitor and maintain hardware devices such as cabinets, subracks, boards, and
disk arrays. It also allows users to view device information and status in real time, and
perform operations on boards such as powering on and off the boards, resetting the
boards, and changing their IP addresses.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

The OSMU provides a device panel, which displays hardware configuration and status
in graphics and provides command portals for querying hardware status and
maintaining boards. On the device panel, users can query basic information about
subracks, power entry modules (PEMs), self management modules (SMMs), and
boards, health events, and sensor information. They can also maintain boards with
functions such as powering on and off, resetting, and switching over the boards.

The software management function allows users to centrally manage various software
packages, including the VCS, operating system, database, and application packages. It
also allows users to install antivirus software and applications of the M2000, PRS, and
Nastar, upgrade M2000 applications, and manage the VCS software license.

The service management function allows users to start and stop board and system
services, and query cluster resource status and OSS product versions. It also provides
product-specific functions for OSSs, such as northbound interface commissioning,
mediation installation, and fault information collection for the M2000, and a
management tool for the PRS.

System maintenance includes time and route management, operating system and
database password management, and device preventive maintenance.

The OSMU centrally backs up the operating system, database, OSMU, and OSS
applications from server boards to disk arrays, and restores the system using backup
data. Each OSS product backs up its service data in the database and dumps the data to
the OSMU. The data is restored on the OSMU.

OSMU maintenance supports self-management functions, such as monitoring


hardware, signing and verifying software, and managing logs. The hardware
components that can be monitored are boards, subracks, power supplies, and fans.
After detecting a hardware fault, the OSMU automatically generates an alarm and
reports it to the M2000 for centralized monitoring. When the OSMU fails to
communicate with the M2000, the M2000 detects that the fault occurred on the OSMU
and generates an alarm.

The OSMU centrally manages system tasks created by management modules. Users
can perform or delete the tasks and view task information in real time, such as the
execution type, status, progress, and start and end time.

Enhancement
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R012C00:
Installing antivirus software and updating virus definitions for all boards through the
OSMU
Querying hardware status on the device panel
Deploying the eSAU (a module of the Nastar) with the M2000
Detecting OSMU faults
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R011C01:
Centrally deploying the M2000 (including the Trace Server), PRS, and Nastar in a cabinet
configured with two subracks
Performing OS hardening for the OSMU and OSSs
Enhancing OSMU maintenance, including monitoring hardware, signing and verifying
software, and recording and managing logs
Acting as an intermediate NTP server to obtain reference time from the upper-level clock
source and providing clock synchronization signals for the M2000 and the PRS
Upgrading the PRS software through the OSMU
Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Dependency
The ATAE cluster solution of the current version does not support or does not involve the
following features:
WOFD-000600 Database Hardening
WOFD-130100 Local HA System
WOFD-530200 Remote HA System
WOFD-530100 Server Load Sharing
WOFD-210700 Emergency System for Single-Server and Local HA System
WOFD-210800 Emergency System for SLS System
WOFD-500100 Veritas System Backup and Restore Solution
WOFD-040900 Single Sign On

WOFD-070100 Local Maintenance Agent


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Description
The M2000 provides communication agents for local maintenance terminals (LMTs) to
maintain NEs. When an NE and its LMT are located on different network segments, the LMT
can connect to the NE through the agent provided by the M2000 to maintain the NE.
Along with the development and spread of the web LMT, M2000 can also be a communication
proxy for the web LMT.
LMTs can still set up connections to NEs through SSL or HTTPs to ensure transmission
security when using the M2000 as an agent.

WOFD-070800 Supporting Network Time Synchronization


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Summary
The M2000 supports the NTP/SNTP network time synchronization protocols so that it can
synchronize time with the time server of a third-party system and provide synchronization time
sources for NEs. This ensures that the time between the M2000 and the NEs is synchronized.
In addition, according to the security policy of the telecom operator, the M2000 uses MD5
encrypted algorithm defined in the NTP V3 in time synchronization.

Benefits
This feature ensures that the time of NEs on the entire network is synchronized. In addition, it
supports adopting the encrypted authentication to enhance the security of network time
synchronization.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Description
If the NTP server provided by a telecom operator network cannot communicate with the mobile
communication devices managed by the M2000, the M2000 server can function as an
intermediate NTP server. The M2000 server obtains the reference time from the NTP server
provided by the telecom operator and sends time synchronization signals to NEs to ensure the
consistency between the time of all NEs and the time of the time source. The M2000 monitors
the operating status of the NTP service in real time and generates an alarm after detecting any
exceptions in the NTP service or a synchronization failure with the upper-level time source.
The NTP protocol supports two authentication modes: unauthenticated and encrypted
authentication. Telecom operators can determine the authentication mode according to security
requirements. If the upper-layer NTP server provided by the telecom operator uses the
encrypted authentication mode, the M2000 server can function as the NTP client to synchronize
time with the upper-layer NTP server.
This feature requires telecom operators to provide a top-level clock source server. If telecom
operators require a top-level clock source server from Huawei, they need to purchase Huawei
entire-network time synchronization solution. For details about the solution, see the feature
WOFD-540100 Network Time Synchronization Solution.

Enhancement
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R011C00:
The M2000 generates an alarm after detecting any exceptions in the NTP service or a
synchronization failure with the upper-level time source.
The M2000 functions as an intermediate NTP server in an SLS system, Sun-based local
and remote HA systems, HP-based single-server and local HA systems, and ATAE-based
single-server and local HA systems.
The following function is added to M2000 V200R009:
The M2000 supports encrypted authentication of the NTP.

Dependency
None

WOFD-070900 Daylight Saving Time and Management of Multiple Time Zones


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R003.

Description
For some countries that use the daylight saving time (DST), there are two time switchovers
every year. Some countries cross multiple time zones. Therefore, the time of NEs in different
time zones must be different.
This feature ensures that the M2000 adapts to DST shifts on NEs and allows users to set time
zone information. For example, users can choose whether to display server time or local NE
time in the alarm browse window. If the area where an NE is located is using DST, the M2000
displays DST in MML messages.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

WOFD-071200 Centralized Task Manager


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R005.

Description
Centralized task manager is a task management mechanism of the M2000. It manages and
controls all the scheduled tasks in the M2000 system through a centralized task management
window.
The tasks managed centrally are classified into system-scheduled tasks and user-scheduled
tasks. There are two types of tasks: one-time tasks and periodic tasks. Users can create
user-scheduled tasks and select one-time tasks or periodic tasks as required. All
system-scheduled tasks are periodic tasks and cannot be created by users.
Users can view information about all tasks on the task list provided by the M2000. The task
information includes task name, execution period, type, creator, status, execution progress,
execution result, and last execution time. Users can also perform specific operations on the
tasks, such as start, delete, suspend, copy, or resume the tasks. In addition, users can modify
task parameters.
System-scheduled tasks are as follows:
Database capacity management
Data export
Synchronization
M2000 data backup
The limitations on the operations of system tasks are as follows:
Only users in the administrator group can manage and view system-scheduled tasks.
System-scheduled tasks cannot be copied or deleted, and only some parameters can be
modified.
Data capacity tasks in system-scheduled tasks cannot be suspended or resumed. Data
export tasks, synchronization tasks, and backup tasks can be suspended and resumed.
Users can set the time to suspend and resume tasks.
User-scheduled tasks are as follows:
NE license backup
NE backup
BSC and RNC license activation
Distribution of NodeB licenses
MML script execution
iSStar script execution
Software download
Verification after upgrade
Generation of configuration reports
Single antenna interference cancellation (SAIC) terminal capability sharing
Configuration data synchronization on the CME

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Data consistency check on the CME


Export of data from the current data area on the CME

Enhancement
SAIC terminal capability sharing for GSM is added to M2000 V200R012C00.

Dependency
None

WOFD-071300 Script Trigger


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R006.

Description
This feature supports two triggering modes, customizing menus to trigger scripts and automatic
triggering.
Customizing menus to trigger scripts: This function allows users to customize the menus for
script triggering. Users can add, delete, modify, or query user-defined menus. When adding a
user-defined menu, users can select the script and set script execution parameters. The
user-defined menus are used to trigger scripts stored on the M2000 client.
Automatic triggering: The M2000 allows users to set script triggering conditions and specify
the scripts. Triggering conditions include validity time range, script type, execution period, and
alarm ID. The M2000 automatically checks whether script triggering conditions are met. If the
conditions are met, the corresponding script is automatically triggered.
The automatically triggered scripts are scripts stored on the M2000 server. Currently, HSL
scripts and the following Shell scripts can be automatically triggered:
Bourne Again shell
Bourne shell
C shell
Z shell
Korn shell
TC shell

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R008:
This feature can be used for triggering the HSL script.

WOFD-071400 Auto IP Address Allocation Service for BTS


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R008.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Description
The M2000 automatically assigns IP addresses to BTSs through the DHCP protocol. The
M2000 extends the DHCP protocol based on the standard protocol to support the required
functions, and automatically assigns IP addresses to Huawei base stations on IP networks based
on the extended DHCP protocol. The DHCP Server service provides the following functions:
The M2000 extends protocols based on the DHCP protocol and assigns IP addresses based
on specific configuration information such as the BTS name, BTS ID, IP address, and
electronic serial number (ESN).
The M2000 allows users to add, delete, or modify the binding relationships between
specific NE configuration information and IP addresses on the M2000 client. It also allows
users to import the information about the binding relationships into a file.
The M2000 allows users to view the assignment information about IP addresses. To
facilitate information browse, it also allows users to filter IP address assignment records
by fields such as BTS ID, BTS name, and ESN.

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R011C01:
Allowing users to filter IP address assignment records by fields such as BTS ID, BTS
name, and ESN

WOFD-071500 User Profile Management


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R008.

Description
The user profile setting provides the user-defined settings based on M2000 users. Therefore,
multiple maintenance terminals can share the user-defined user settings. The M2000 provides
default settings for all M2000 users. The supported profile setting options are as follows:
Display styles of parameter settings on the M2000 client, such as area setting, metrology
setting, LMT prompt setting, agent server setting, MML client setting, file transfer
parameter setting, alarm sound and colors, time mode, system lock time, data display
modes, system login modes, display of alarm states in the topology view, and display of
the performance module interface.
Environment setting of function interfaces, such as the topology view, activated subnets
and filter criteria in the topology view, filter criteria for querying alarms, and alarm query
templates.

WOFD-080100 Disk Redundant Backup


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Description
The local disks of the M2000 support the RAID 1 backup mode (1+1 disk mirroring).
The supported redundancy solutions vary according to disk array types. Sun 6140, Sun 3320,
OceanStor S3100, and OceanStor S3200 disk arrays support the RAID 5+Hotspare mode. Sun
6180, OceanStor S2600, and OceanStor S3900 disk arrays support the RAID 10+Hotspare
mode.

WOFD-080200 Dual Plane Communication


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Description
The M2000 supports the dual-plane networking of operation and maintenance, in which two
independent communication links form an O&M network. The M2000 automatically monitors
the communication status of both channels. The routine communication is performed on the
active plane. If the active plane is faulty, the M2000 automatically switches the communication
to the standby plane to ensure the reliability of the O&M network.

WOFD-080300 M2000 Data Backup and Restore


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Summary
The M2000 provides the backup and restore solutions for M2000 data. According to the
characteristics of backup data, the backup and restore is classified into backup and restore of
application data including M2000 application and service data, backup and restore of database
applications, and backup and restore of operating systems. The M2000 provides different
backup and restore solutions based on the levels.

Benefits
This feature brings about the following benefits:
The M2000 provides cost-efficient backup and restore solutions for the O&M network.
With the characteristics of simple configuration and flexible deployment, the backup and
restore solutions require only tape drives and related tapes. Therefore, the solutions are
easy to use.
The M2000 provides backup and restore solutions at multiple levels, meeting the
requirements of primary O&M application scenarios.

Description
This feature provides the following functions:
Backing up and restoring application data

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

19

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Application data consists of the data in the M2000 application and the service data in the
M2000 database.
The M2000 provides a user-friendly GUI for backup operations and management. Users
can set backup tasks on the M2000 client to back up the application data of the M2000 in
full or incremental backup mode. The M2000 using the Sybase database supports both full
and incremental backups. The M2000 using the Oracle database supports only the full
backup.
The system provides automatic and manual backups. A manual backup is started
immediately after users activate the backup. Manual backups can be implemented in
incremental or full backup mode. The M2000 manages automatic backup tasks based on
the feature WOFD-071200 Centralized Task Manager. In each backup period, the M2000
using Sybase database performs a full backup on the first day. Users can set the M2000 to
perform no backup or an incremental backup on each of the other days. Users can also
specify the backup execution time and period. The M2000 using Oracle database performs
a full backup each day. Users can also specify the backup execution time.
The backup data is stored on the disk array of the M2000 server or external tape drives.
The M2000 based on ATAE platform stores the backup data on the disk array.
To restore the application data in specified full and incremental backup files to the
database and applications, users need to run the restore script.
Backing up and restoring the database application and operating systems
Database applications consist of database server application and database device files.
Operating system data involves all the files related to the operating system.
Users perform the backup or recovery of the database application and operating system by
running the scripts. Database applications and operating systems are backed up to the local
hard disk and disk array of the M2000 server or external tape drives. The M2000 based on
ATAE platform stores the backup data on the disk array.

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R012C00:
The M2000 system using M4000 or M5000 servers allows users to back up the operating
system to the local hard disk of the M2000 server.
The following function is added to M2000 V200R011C00:
Users can back up database applications to local hard disk of the M2000 server.

WOFD-080400 NE Data Backup and Restore


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Summary
The M2000 supports the backup and restore of key NE data. If NE data is missing due to a fault,
users can use the backup data to restore the NE data on the M2000.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

20

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Description
Generally, key NE data (such as NE configuration data and logs) is stored on NEs. The M2000
backs up NE data by obtaining the data from NEs and saving it on the disk array of the M2000
server or downloading the data to the M2000 client.
Key NE data is backed up and restored on the M2000. The data can be backed up manually or
automatically on a scheduled basis. The M2000 centrally manages and schedules backup tasks
by using the feature WOFD-071200 Centralized Task Manager. The M2000 backs up NE data
based on the preset period and time.
Data must be restored manually because it may lead to NE restart. After users restore NE data,
the M2000 downloads backup NE data to the NE and runs data restoration commands for the
data to take effect. Users must upload the NE data that was downloaded and stored on the
M2000 client to the M2000 server before restoring the data.
NE logs cannot be modified or replaced, and the restore of NE logs may result in invalid modification of
the NE logs. Therefore, the M2000 does not provide the function of restoring NE logs.

WOFD-210200 Automatic File Upload


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R008.

Summary
The M2000 supports the function of automatically uploading the northbound configuration
files, performance files, inventory files and alarm files to the specified FTP server by using FTP.
To ensure data transmission security, the M2000 supports SFTP-based file transfer with the
third-party system. For details, see the optional feature WOFD-210100 Encrypted
Transmission.

Benefits
This feature reduces the workload and costs for developing a third-party system.
The M2000 sets up and manages the transmission connection.
In the HA, remote HA, or SLS system, the switchover between the active node and the
standby node does not affect the uploading of files to the third-party system.

Description
This feature provides the following functions:
Configuring the uploaded information about the server
On the client, users can choose to upload the exported files of configuration data, alarms,
performance data, inventory data, and license data and set the IP address, directory, user
name, password, and file compression mode of the server. The M2000 creates a directory
on the server according to the settings. Users can configure specific file servers for
different types of data. The M2000 can upload data files to a maximum of 10 file servers.
Supporting the file transfer in single- or multi-connection mode

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

21

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

The types of northbound exported files comprise the configuration files, performance files,
alarm files, and inventory files. The M2000 can upload the files of each type to one server
(single-connection) or multiple servers (multi-connection). By default, the
single-connection mode is used. Users can set the uploading mode.
Creating a directory on the uploading server
Users can create a directory on the server for the M2000 to save uploaded northbound files.
Alternatively, the M2000 can create a directory for saving the files. The directory structure
is the same as that of the M2000 northbound export file directory.
Managing file transfer
On the M2000 client, users can browse files to be transferred and files failing to be
transferred. In addition, users can delete the files to be transferred.
Users can automatically re-transfer the files that failed to be transferred according to the
configuration parameters.

The valid duration for re-transferring the files is 1 hour. The system cancels the transfer
of the files that exceed the valid duration.

The system transfers the files again three times. The system records the files that are
re-transferred more than three times, to the logs.

The interval for re-transferring files is 15 minutes.

Managing faults
If a file fails to be uploaded to a third-party system because the FTP service of the
third-party system is not enabled or the network is disconnected, the M2000 generates an
alarm and forwards this alarm to the third-party system through the northbound alarm
interface.

Enhancement
In M2000 V200R010, the M2000 generates an alarm if a file fails to be uploaded to a
third-party system.

Dependency
This feature is used with the following features to implement automatic file upload and cannot
work independently:
WOFD-100210 Alarm File Interface
WOFD-100220 Performance File Interface
WOFD-100230 Configuration File Interface
WOFD-100240 Inventory File Interface
WOFD-261000 Interface for Exporting Configuration Data Files GBSS
WOFD-184500 Interface for Exporting Configuration Data Files WRAN
WOFD-188011 Interface for Exporting Configuration Data Files LTE
WOFD-070400 NE License Management

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

22

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

2.2 Fault Management


WOFD-010100 Centralized Storage of Alarm Information
Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Description
The M2000 centrally collects the alarm information about all the entities (including the M2000
itself) of managed networks and stores the alarm information in the database. The fault
management module of the M2000 can manage alarms and events. Alarms are classified into
ADAC alarms and ADMC alarms. Unless otherwise stated, alarms mentioned in this document
do not include events.
Event: An event is a notification that is generated and needs to be sent to users when the system
is running properly. For example, the notification can be the deletion, modification, or status
change of an object.
Fault: A fault occurs when the system is running improperly. The fault may affect the operation
capability or backup capability.
Alarm: An alarm is a notification that is generated when the system detects a fault.
Based on the detection capability, alarms are categorized as ADAC alarms and ADMC alarms.
ADAC (Auto Detected Auto Cleared) alarm: An ADAC alarm is generated and cleared when
specified conditions are met. When a fault occurs, an alarm occurrence notification is generated.
After the fault is cleared, an alarm clearance notification is generated.
ADMC alarm: An ADMC alarm is generated when specified conditions are met, but it cannot
be cleared automatically. When a fault occurs, an alarm occurrence notification is generated.
An alarm clearance notification, however, is not sent. O&M personnel need to check that the
fault is cleared and manually clear the ADMC alarm.
After receiving the alarm and event reported by an NE, the M2000 preprocesses the alarm and
event and stores them in the centralized mode. The information serves as the reference for
future browse, collection of statistics, and query.
The M2000 records each alarm or event as one log. The database stores alarm or event logs for
a maximum of 90 days. Users can change the period. If the M2000 alarm database does not
meet the standard configuration or the network size exceeds the management capacity of the
server, users may not be able to store the logs for 90 days. When the M2000 reaches the end of
the storage period or disk capacity limit, the M2000 automatically dumps event logs and logs
for acknowledged and cleared alarms to files.

WOFD-010300 Alarm Viewer


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

23

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Summary
This feature allows users to view the alarms and events of NEs and the M2000 in real time.
Based on the browse results, users can also perform operations such as saving and printing
alarm information, viewing detailed alarm information, and locating alarms in the topology
view. Users can set conditions for filtering alarms or save the filter criteria as a template for
future use.
In addition, users can customize the colors and properties of alarms and events displayed in the
browse window. Users can also set the uncleared alarms to be highlighted.

Benefits
This feature brings about the following benefits:
The M2000 allows users to browse alarms on the entire network in real time. It also allows
users to set various filter criteria to focus on key network faults.
The function of customizing display styles helps users to personalize working interfaces.

Description
This feature is described as follows:
Alarm/Event browse
The M2000 displays the alarms that meet the preset filter criteria in the alarm/event
browse window. Multiple browse windows can be opened concurrently to display alarm
logs, event logs, and alarm lists. Users can set filter criteria in each browse window.
The alarm list displays important alarms that users must focus on or handle. If an alarm has
duplicate alarm records, only one record is displayed in the alarm list. During routine
maintenance, O&M personnel need to monitor only the alarm list. By default,
acknowledged and cleared alarms are not stored in the alarm list. Users can store these
alarms after setting a storage period.
Users can set the following filter criteria: alarm source (including NE type, NE, MO,
MBTS, object group, and topology maintenance area), severity, type, and name. Events do
not need to be cleared or acknowledged. Therefore, log browse does not support
status-related filter criteria such as clearance status and acknowledgment status.
The M2000 supports the following alarm types:

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Power system alarm

Environment system alarm

Signaling system alarm

Trunk system alarm

Hardware system alarm

Software system alarm

Running system alarm

Communication system alarm

QoS alarm

Processing error alarm

Internal alarm

Integrity violation alarm

Operational violation alarm

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

24

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Physical violation alarm

Security violation alarm

Time domain violation alarm

In addition, the M2000 supports the browse of alarms based on alarm categories. Users
can browse alarms according to alarm severities or alarm statuses in the same window.
Alarms statuses are unacknowledged and uncleared, unacknowledged and cleared,
acknowledged and uncleared, and acknowledged and clear.
In the event browse window, users can query event details, locate an event on the
corresponding NE in the topology view, mask the event, or send a remote event
notification. In the alarm browse windows, users can perform more operations, such as
acknowledging, unacknowledging, and clearing alarms.
Template
Users can save common filter criteria as a template so that they can use the template to set
filter criteria when browsing alarms or events. The M2000 filters the browse results
according to the conditions set in the template. Alarm templates are saved by user.
The owner of a template is the user who creates the template. Such users can share their
templates with other users. Administrators can manage and use all templates. Common
users can manage and use their templates and shared templates.
The M2000 provides a centralized template management window. Users can manage their
templates, for example, viewing, creating, deleting, modifying, and renaming templates.
Alarm/Event groups and object groups
The M2000 allows users to view, query, and collect the statistics on alarms and events
based on alarm/event groups and object groups.
An alarm or event group is a set of alarms or events.
An object group is a set of objects where alarms or events are generated, for example, NEs,
boards, cells, and links.
Users can define alarm/event groups and object groups according to the actual
requirements.
Saving and printing alarm/event information
Users can save the alarm or event information in the browse window as TXT, HTML, PDF,
XLS, and CSV files or print the information. Users can save or print part of or all alarms.
Customizing alarm/event display styles
The M2000 allows users to customize the following elements in the alarm browse
window:

Colors in which alarms/events are displayed

Attributes of the alarms/events to be displayed

Orders for sorting alarm/event attribute columns

Conditions for sorting alarm/event attributes

The settings take effect only on the current client.


Alarm properties include alarm names, severities, types, location information, IDs,
clearance status, and acknowledgment status. Events do not need to be cleared or
acknowledged. Therefore, log browse does not support status-related filter criteria such as
clearance status and acknowledgment status.
In the alarm browse window, users can sort alarms/events according to one or more
alarm/event attributes.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

25

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Alarms and events of different severities are identified with different colors. Users can
modify the default settings. The settings take effect in the alarm browse window, alarm
boards, and alarm icons in the topology view.
The M2000 checks alarms and highlights the alarms that are in the unacknowledged and
uncleared state, unacknowledged and cleared state, and acknowledged and uncleared state
for a long time. Users can set thresholds for alarms of different severities. When the status
or state duration reaches the preset thresholds, the M2000 highlights the corresponding
alarms.

Enhancement
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R009:
The M2000 allows users to open the device panel of the NE that generates the selected
alarm when users locate the device panel in the alarm viewer.
The M2000 supports alarm/event groups and object groups. Users can perform operations
such as viewing, querying, and collecting the statistics on alarms and events based on
alarm/event groups and object groups.

WOFD-014200 Real-Time Alarm Notification


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Summary
The M2000 supports the real-time notification of alarms in the forms of sound, light, blinking,
and display of statistical results. Alarms are notified through alarm boxes, alarm boards, tool
tips, and real-time statistics.

Benefits
The M2000 supports the real-time alarm notification in multiple modes. This ensures that users
can learn about the generation and clearance of alarms in real time to take corresponding
troubleshooting measures, reducing the impacts on network services.

Description
This feature is described as follows:
Alarm box
The M2000 notifies users of audible and visual alarms through an alarm box. The alarm
box is connected to the M2000 client through a serial port. The M2000 client sends the
alarms that meet the preset conditions to the alarm box in real time. Then, the alarm box
generates sound and the corresponding alarm indicators blink according to the alarm
severities. Users can filter alarms based on alarm severities or by using a query template.
The filter criteria set in a query template are the same as the filter criteria in the feature
WOFD-010300 Alarm Viewer.
Alarm notification by sound and light
M2000 provides alarm boards to display the total number of current alarms, number of
alarms of each severity, and number of alarms of each severity in each status in real time

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

26

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

and to notify users of new alarms by emitting sound and through blinking icons. Users can
customize notification sound.
Users can set a template to control the range for collecting the statistics of alarms. The
conditions in the template are the same as the conditions described in the feature
WOFD-010300 Alarm Viewer.
Tool tip
After users set the alarm indication in the topology view, the NE icon is identified in the
color of the alarm of the highest severity when alarms in the same status exist on an NE.
The alarm states that can be selected are unacknowledged and uncleared. In addition, users
can set whether to display the current number of alarms of the highest severity on NEs.
Real-time collection of alarm statistics
When creating statistical charts, users need to select alarm templates. According to filter
criteria in the alarm list templates, the M2000 filters alarms and collects the statistics of
alarms based on alarm severities and types. The statistical results are displayed in a bar
chart and are updated in real time according to the generation or clearance of alarms.
Users can select multiple alarm list templates to create multiple statistical charts.
Users can obtain the details about alarm sources in masking conditions by referring to the feature
WOFD-010300 Alarm Viewer.

WOFD-011400 Automatic Alarm Retrieval


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Description
After the connection between the M2000 and NEs is restored, the M2000 automatically
synchronizes the data between the M2000 and NEs to obtain the alarm data generated during
the disconnection. This feature ensures that the alarm data on the M2000 and NEs is consistent.
When NEs report alarms to the M2000, the M2000 automatically checks whether the alarm data
on the M2000 is consistent with that on NEs. If the data is inconsistent, the M2000
synchronizes the alarm data on the M2000 with that on NEs.

WOFD-011500 Alarm Synchronization


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Description
Generally, after an alarm is generated on an NE or the M2000, the alarm is automatically
reported to the M2000 in real time. The M2000 supports manual and scheduled alarm
synchronization modes. Therefore, alarms can be synchronized in the following scenarios:
The connection between an NE and the M2000 is restored after it is disrupted.
The status of an alarm is updated after the alarm is handled.
The M2000 supports manual alarm synchronization and scheduled alarm synchronization.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

27

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

In manual synchronization mode, users manually synchronize the alarm data on the M2000
with that on NEs through the M2000 client.
Scheduled synchronization tasks are managed and scheduled by using the feature
WOFD-071200 Centralized Task Manager. In scheduled synchronization mode, the M2000
synchronizes the alarm data on the M2000 with that on NEs according to the preset period and
time. Users can change the synchronization period and time. The unit of the synchronization
period is day. The default synchronization period is one day.

WOFD-014000 Alarm Pre-Processing on M2000


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Summary
Alarm pre-processing on the M2000 refers to processing the new alarms and events received by
the M2000 before they are saved to the database. Alarm pre-processing involves alarm masking,
alarm severity redefinition, and alarm correlation analysis.

Benefits
The M2000 provides flexible functions of masking alarms and customizing the rules for
analyzing alarm correlations. This helps in sharing the maintenance experience of O&M
personnel, reducing the number of alarms, and improving work efficiency.

Description
This feature provides the following functions:
Masking alarms and events
After receiving alarms or events, the M2000 checks and discards the alarms or events that
meet the preset masking conditions.
The supported conditions for masking alarms and events include alarm/event sources,
alarm/event severities, alarm/event names, alarm location information, alarm duration,
and alarm/event types. Users can also set the time segment for alarm masking conditions
to take effect.
Delayed alarm/event processing: If the duration of an alarm/event is shorter than the
threshold set in the alarm/event masking criteria, the M2000 discards the alarm/event after
analyzing toggling alarms. When the duration of an alarm/event reaches or exceeds the
preset threshold, the M2000 delays processing the alarm/event. The delay time equals the
preset threshold of alarm/event duration.
Users can obtain the details about alarm sources in masking conditions by referring to the feature
WOFD-010300 Alarm Viewer.

Redefining alarm and event severities


Users can modify the properties of alarms and events on the M2000. For example, users
can change the severities, names, and types of alarms and events. After the alarm and
event properties are redefined, the M2000 displays the alarms and events based on the new
properties. The redefinition takes effect only on the M2000. On NEs, the properties of
alarms and events remain unchanged.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

28

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Alarm severities can be redefined on the basis of time segments, such as during a busy
hour and a non-busy hour.
Analyzing correlations
Correlation rules are classified into default and user-defined rules.
Default rules are provided by the system and can be instantiated by users. These rules are
used for analyzing alarm or event occurrence frequency, intermittent alarms, repeated
events, and duration of acknowledged and uncleared alarms.
Associated concepts are described as follows:
Alarm or event occurrence frequency: If the number of repeated alarms or events exceeds
a preset threshold within a specified period, the M2000 considers that these alarms or
events are correlated and performs one of the following operations, which have different
threshold ranges:

Changing the alarm or event severity

Generating an avalanche alarm

Generating an avalanche alarm and masking alarms or events

Generating a toggling alarm

Intermittent alarm: The M2000 generates an intermittent alarm if the interval for reporting
the clearance alarm of an alarm is within a specified period. The M2000 displays only the
first intermittent alarm and discards other ones. If the number of intermittent alarms
exceeds a preset threshold within a specified period, the M2000 generates a
high-frequency intermittent alarm. When intermittent alarms are generated at a lower
frequency than the threshold, the high-frequency intermittent alarm is automatically
cleared.
Repeated event: The M2000 generates a repeated event if the interval for reporting an
event is within a specified period. The M2000 displays only the first repeated event and
discards other ones. If the number of repeated events exceeds a preset threshold within a
specified period, the M2000 generates a high-frequency repeated event.
With the correlation analysis function, users can create rule instances for analyzing
alarms/events frequency, intermittent alarms, and repeated events. If alarms/events meet
the preset conditions, the M2000 deals with the information about redundant
alarms/events according to the preset policy. This prevents the M2000 from generating or
clearing the same alarms, enhancing system reliability.
The purpose of analyzing the duration of acknowledged and uncleared alarms is to prompt
users to clear these alarms in time. If certain alarms are already acknowledged but are not
cleared for a long time, the M2000 sets the severity of these alarms to a higher level.
The M2000 allows users to define alarm correlation rules by setting root alarms, correlated
alarms, handling methods, handling conditions, analysis periods, and priorities through
the creation wizard.
Users can delete or modify alarm correlation rules.
After users apply advanced correlation rules, the M2000 discards the alarms/events that
meet the correlation rules. It can also redefine the severities of these alarms or set them to
correlative alarms. Therefore, the number of unnecessary alarms/events is reduced and
non-root alarms/events are not considered. Therefore, users can handle key alarms/events
to quickly locate and rectify related faults.
Advanced correlation rules support the following functions:

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Setting correlations within a single NE and among multiple NEs.

The main property values in the alarm locating information can serve as correlation
conditions.

Users can set the interval for analyzing correlations.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

29

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Converting events to ADMC alarms


The M2000 allows users to convert an event to an ADMC alarm. Then, the ADMC alarm
is displayed in the alarm list. After the conversion setting is canceled, newly reported
records of this event are no longer displayed in the alarm list.

Enhancement
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R011C01:
The M2000 generates a summarized parallel alarm when the number of alarms meeting
the requirements exceeds Set Threshold.
The M2000 clears the summarized parallel alarm when the number of alarms is smaller
than Clear Threshold.
Users can add or delete summarized parallel alarm rule.
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R011C00:
The M2000 generates a toggling alarm in analyzing alarm or event occurrence frequency.
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R010:
The M2000 supports redefinition of alarm severities based on time segments.
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R009:
A wizard for creating advanced correlation rules is added, which improves the usability of
this feature.
The names and types of alarms/events can be redefined.

WOFD-012200 Alarm Severity Redefinition on NE


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Description
Alarm severity redefinition on NEs allows users to change the severities of alarms and events
on NEs. After severities of alarms and events are redefined, NEs report alarms and events
according to the new severities, and the M2000 displays the alarms and events according to the
new severities.

WOFD-012400 Alarm Masking on NE


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Description
Alarm masking on NEs allows users to set masking conditions on the M2000 and send the
conditions to NEs so that NEs do not report the alarms and events that meet the masking
conditions. Therefore, the masking for alarms and events is implemented on NEs.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

30

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

The M2000 masks alarms and events according to alarm/event names and severities. When
setting masking conditions, users can sort NE objects according to NE types and sort alarms
and events according to alarm/event types and severities. This facilitates alarm/event selection.
Some NEs such as the BSC6900 GSM and BSC6900 GU can mask alarms and events
according to objects. The supported objects are cells and GBTSs.
Users can modify, delete, or query preset alarm masking conditions.
In addition, the M2000 allows users to import the masking conditions of alarms and events
from a file to the M2000. Users can export the preset masking conditions as a template, set
masking conditions in the template, and import the template to the M2000. Then, the M2000
generates masking conditions based on the records in the file.

WOFD-013400 Environment Alarm Setting


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Summary
To monitor NE environments, the M2000 supports the settings of environment alarms.

Benefits
Users can customize environment alarms to learn about the faults in the equipment room
environment and remotely monitor the environment centrally. This helps ensure the normal
equipment operation.

Description
Based on the actual situations, users can set environment alarms of NEs through the M2000
client, and bind the alarms with an NE port. In addition, users can mount an environment
monitoring device on the port so that NEs can generate alarms and report the alarms to the
M2000 in real time when the environment monitoring device detects environment faults.
This feature requires alarm definition and binding information.
The alarm information to be defined includes alarm names, severities, and IDs.
Alarm binding information indicates the mapping between environment monitoring devices
and defined alarms (including alarm generation conditions). After the binding, NEs can
generate alarms based on the binding conditions and report the alarms to the M2000.
The M2000 also allows users to import and export environment alarms as XLS files. Users
export a template from the M2000, fill in required information, and import the template into the
M2000. The M2000 can then generate environment alarms based on the information in the
template.

Enhancement
The functions of importing and exporting environment alarms are added to M2000
V200R012C00.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

31

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

WOFD-014100 Alarm Post-Processing on M2000


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Summary
In alarm post-processing on the M2000, the M2000 allows users to perform a series of
operations on the alarms stored in the database, such as acknowledging alarms,
unacknowledging alarms, and collecting the statistics of alarms.

Benefits
According to the requirements of the 3GPP specifications, alarm acknowledgment, alarm
unacknowledgment, and status switch are supported to meet the requirements of network
O&M scenarios.
The M2000 collects the statistics on alarms based on different dimensions and displays the
statistical results on the GUI so that users can directly learn about the alarm distribution on
the network.

Description
This feature provides the following functions:
Acknowledging and unacknowledging alarms
After users successfully acknowledge an alarm, its status automatically changes to
"Acknowledged." The M2000 supports manual acknowledgment and automatic
acknowledgment. In manual acknowledgment mode, users can select and acknowledge
alarms in the alarm browse window. In automatic acknowledgment mode, alarms can be
automatically acknowledged according to the preset conditions.
Users can learn about the details of alarm sources in the automatic alarm acknowledgment conditions by
referring to the feature WOFD-010300 Alarm Viewer.

Users can unacknowledge the alarms that are acknowledged but not cleared. After an
alarm is successfully unacknowledged, its status automatically changes to
"Unacknowledged."
The M2000 records the information about the time and the user who performs the related
operations.
Collecting alarm and event statistics
Users can collect the statistics of alarms and events based on multiple dimensions. The
statistical results can be displayed in a table or pie chart.
Supported statistical conditions are NE types, NEs, alarm/event names, severities, types,
and status. Users can collect alarm statistics based on a maximum of three conditions.
Users can save the statistical results as TXT, HTML, CSV, XLS, or PDF files, or print the
results.
In addition, users can filter alarms before collecting statistics. The supported filter criteria
are the same as the conditions described in the feature WOFD-010300 Alarm Viewer.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

32

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

WOFD-012000 Automatic Alarm Clearing


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Description
When the fault on an NE or on the M2000 is rectified, the NE reports a clear alarm and the
M2000 sets the status of the corresponding fault alarm to "Cleared."

WOFD-011900 Manual Alarm Clearing


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Description
On the M2000 client, users can manually clear specified alarms. After an alarm is cleared, the
M2000 changes the status of this alarm to "Cleared" and instructs the related NE to change the
alarm status to "Cleared." This feature is used to clear the alarms that cannot be automatically
cleared or the alarms that do not exist according to user confirmation.

WOFD-013300 Alarm Checking


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Description
This feature allows users on the M2000 client to check whether the status of a specified alarm is
consistent on the M2000 and on NEs. If the status is inconsistent, the M2000 updates the alarm
status.

WOFD-013900 Alarm Correlation View


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R008.

Summary
This feature is used for classifying NE alarms into root alarms and correlative alarms,
depending on alarm generation causes. This feature allows O&M personnel to focus on root
alarms in the case of excessive alarms. Generally, multiple correlative alarms may result from a
root alarm. If a root alarm is cleared, most of its correlative alarms are cleared automatically.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

33

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Benefits
Device O&M personnel can clear root alarms first so that most of the correlative alarms can be
cleared automatically. Therefore, manual operations are reduced and maintenance efficiency is
improved.

Description
This feature provides the following functions:
Analyzing alarm correlations
When alarms are generated, NEs and the M2000 analyze the correlated alarms, identify
root alarms and correlative alarms, and report analysis results to the M2000.
Displaying alarm correlations
The M2000 displays the correlations between root alarms and correlative alarms in the
alarm browse window. This helps users to quickly locate faults.
The M2000 displays correlations between root and correlative alarms in the alarm browse
window. Users can quickly and efficiently locate faults by checking alarm correlations.
Users can disable this function if they do not require the correlated alarms reported by NEs.
After this function is disabled, the M2000 does not display the correlations between root
and correlative alarms reported from NEs.

Enhancement
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R011C01:
Displaying alarm correlations for USNs
Controlling the switch of alarm correlation display
In M2000 V200R010, this feature applies to the MSC Server, MGW, and SGSN.
In M2000 V200R009, this feature applies to the BSC6900 GSM and GBTS.

Dependency
This feature applies to eRAN1.0, G&U CS8.3, and G&U PS8.1 and later versions.

WOFD-012900 Alarm Information Base


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Description
This feature allows users to record the explanations of alarms or events and the troubleshooting
experience in the alarm information base through the M2000 client. The M2000 keeps the
records in terms of the alarm/event ID. To facilitate maintenance experience sharing, the
M2000 allows users to export the alarm information base as an XML, CSV, TXT, XLS, HTML,
or PDF file. It also allows users to import an external alarm information base as an XML file to
append to or replace the original alarm information base on the M2000.
The M2000 supports fuzzy search of maintenance experience information based on the names
of alarms and events or keywords of maintenance experience information in the alarm
Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

34

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

knowledge library. The search criteria can be the names of alarms and events, keywords of
maintenance experience information, or the combination of the names and keywords. This imp
roves the efficiency of querying maintenance experience information.
Users can also add comments to alarms and events to record the operations performed on the
alarms and events. The change history (including the user, change time, and contents), is
automatically saved in the comments.

Enhancement
In M2000 V200R009, the M2000 supports fuzzy search of maintenance experience information
based on the names of alarms and events or keywords of maintenance experience information.

WOFD-014500 AP Alarm Management


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R010.

Summary
In the uBro network, access points (APs) are devices on the user side and are managed by the
AP Manager. NEs other than APs are managed by the M2000 such as AHR, AG, and IP Clock
Server. To enable telecom operators to perform centrally routine maintenance on the uBro
network, the M2000 provides the AP alarm management feature, including viewing AP alarms
in real time, and querying, acknowledging, unacknowledging, and clearing AP alarms.

Benefits
O&M personnel can monitor alarms on the entire uBro network through the M2000 without
switching between the M2000 client and the AP Manager client. Therefore, problems are
identified and solved in time and network maintainability and service quality are improved.

Description
After users subscribe to AP alarms on the AP Manager, the AP Manager forwards the AP alarms
to the M2000. After receiving the alarms, the M2000 displays the alarms on the GUI. On the
M2000 client, users can view, acknowledge, unacknowledge, and clear AP alarms. Users can
also post-process alarms, such as collecting the statistics on AP alarms and masking AP alarms.
The specific features supported by the M2000 are as follows:
WOFD-010100 Centralized Storage of Alarm Information
WOFD-010300 Alarm Viewer
WOFD-014200 Real-Time Alarm Notification
WOFD-014000 Alarm Pre-Processing on M2000
WOFD-014100 Alarm Post-Processing on M2000
WOFD-011900 Manual Alarm Clearing
WOFD-012000 Automatic Alarm Clearing
WOFD-013300 Alarm Checking
WOFD-012900 Alarm Information Base

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

35

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

The M2000 collects AP alarms from the AP Manager instead of managing APs as individual
NEs. Therefore, the M2000 allows users to set only AP Manager as the object condition for
querying, viewing, and masking AP alarms on the M2000.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
Only telecom operators adopting Huawei uBro solution can use the AP alarm management
feature. This feature depends on the feature COFD-120100 Real-Time Alarm Management of
the AP Manager. Therefore, to use the feature WOFD-014500 AP Alarm Management, telecom
operators must purchase the feature COFD-120100 Real-Time Alarm Management of the AP
Manager.

WOFD-240400 Antenna Fault Detector GBSS


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R009.

Summary
The faults on the antenna system and radio frequency (RF) channels are caused by the improper
installation of projects when the projects are created, relocated, or optimized. The faults can
also be caused by natural or external changes.
The GBSS antenna fault detection system provides a GUI based on the B/S architecture. On this
GUI, the M2000 remotely detects and locates faults on GBSS antennas, which is more efficient
than the previous onsite O&M mode. This GUI accesses the server using HTTPS, ensuring data
transmission security.

Benefits
This feature brings about the following benefits:
This feature implements the detection of common antenna faults, improving the efficiency
and accuracy of fault diagnosis.
By using this feature, RF engineers do not need to use equipment to measure BTSs on site
every time, reducing the project cost.
This feature adopts the Browser/Server mode, which allows users to manage antennas
through only the web browser instead of installing client software.

Description
The antenna system plays an important role in mobile communications. The performance of the
entire network is affected by the following problems:
Improper type or location of the antenna system
Incorrectly configured parameters of the antenna system
Faulty antenna system

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

36

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

This feature can be used to analyze and compare the performance measurement data of NEs,
analyze the causes of antenna faults through algorithms, and generate analysis reports.
This feature provides the following functions:
Supporting antenna fault detection tasks
The M2000 allows users to create wizard-based tasks, where users can set the NEs to be
detected, the fault type, time range, start time, end time, and algorithm-related parameters.
One task can detect multiple types of faults on multiple BTSs. Antenna fault detection is
based on three algorithms: main and diversity level analysis algorithm, reversely
connected cell analysis algorithm, and downlink problem analysis algorithm. Using these
algorithms, the M2000 diagnoses possible faults on the antenna system, such as a main
antenna fault, only one antenna, RX main and diversity cable fault on the TRX, RXU
TX-RX mode error, and cable fault between RXUs, reversely connected cell antennas, and
TX cable fault on the TRX. The M2000 allows users to manage detection tasks, including
browsing task progress and task status, and creating, starting, stopping, and deleting tasks.
Generating antenna fault detection reports
After an antenna fault detection task is complete, the M2000 generates a detection report
in XLS format.
A detection report consists of the summary information and a list of detailed results. The
summary information includes the total number of NEs, total number of cells, analysis
period, and problem statistics. The list of detailed results provides the detection results of
all detected cells and TRXs based on the fault type. The M2000 also provides the data
about main and diversity levels to help users understand the detection process.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
The function of analyzing main and diversity levels applies to 3012 and 3900 series base
stations, while the function of analyzing downlink problems applies only to 3012 series base
stations.

WOFD-240600 Antenna Fault Detector WRAN


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R010.

Summary
The antenna system receives and transmits signals on communication networks. Antenna faults
are probably caused by improper installation during network setup, reparenting, or optimization,
and they may also be caused by environment changes. These faults have severe impacts on
network quality. To locate and rectify these faults, however, is expensive and time-consuming.
In view of the previous difficulties, the antenna fault detection system provides a GUI based on
the B/S architecture and the WRAN antenna connection detection function. This function helps
engineers check whether antenna connections are correct so that engineers can rectify faults in
time. This reduces subsequent troubleshooting and maintenance costs. This GUI accesses the
server using HTTPS, ensuring data transmission security.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

37

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Benefits
This feature brings about the following benefits:
During site deployment, engineers only need to perform dialing tests by using UEs, and
the M2000 automatically detects antenna installation faults for engineers. This reduces
maintenance costs because engineers do not need to travel to the site a second time.
This feature is based on the Browser/Server (B/S) architecture, which allows users to
manage antenna line devices (ALDs) only by using a web browser instead of installing
client software.

Description
Cross-connection of antenna cables always affects neighbor relationship, cell coverage, or
NodeB receiving sensitivity. Therefore, problems such as UE handover failure, call drop, and
poor call quality may occur. Therefore, troubleshooting cross-connection of antenna cables in a
timely manner is significant for ensuring the service quality of the network.
Site engineers need to start data collection tasks on the M2000 to check for antenna faults.
Before starting a data collection task, site engineering parameters and test UE information must
be set. After starting a data collection task, site engineers use test UEs to perform dialing tests in
all sectors of a NodeB. Then, the M2000 records location information and measurement data
reported by the test UEs and the NodeB.
The M2000 use the fault detection algorithm to check whether the antenna of the NodeB is
properly connected. If the antenna is not properly connected, the M2000 provides correct
antenna connection information. After checking the antenna connection, the M2000 displays
the check results in a table and in a chart. Based on the check results, site engineers can
reconnect the antennas. The table maps each NodeB to a record, which contains the RNC name,
NodeB name, antenna location, configured sectors, connected sectors, and the status, start time,
and end time of the check. Site engineers can export the check results to a file and save the file
on a local PC. The chart displays the connections between antennas and RRUs in a topology
view.
Dialing tests need to be performed at an appropriate location for accurate check results. The
M2000 displays NodeBs, sectors, cells, and the real-time locations of test UEs in a chart. If the
location of a UE is not suitable for dialing tests, site engineers are prompted to adjust its
location.
The detailed information about each detection record lists the antenna location, configured sectors, and
actually connected sectors. Based on the information displayed in the list, engineers can correct the
antenna connection.

Enhancement
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R011C00:
Displaying the real-time locations of test UEs in a chart
Displaying check results in a chart

Dependency
The test UE for the detection must be a PHU that supports the global positioning system (GPS).
BTS3902E WCDMA is not configured with the previously mentioned ALDs, and therefore it
does not support this feature.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

38

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

2.3 Configuration Management


WOFD-020100 Auto-Synchronization for Configuration Alteration
Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Description
If the configuration of an NE is modified, the NE reports a modification notification to the
M2000. Then, the M2000 updates the NE configuration data in the database according to the
notification. This implements the automatic synchronization of configuration data and ensures
the consistency of the configuration data between NEs and the M2000.
Users can view the information about the latest automatic configuration data synchronization of
each NE. The information contains the start time and end time of the synchronization,
synchronization types, synchronization results, and result details.

Enhancement
The function of browsing the information about automatic data configuration synchronization
is added to M2000 V200R008.

WOFD-020200 Configuration Data Synchronization


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Summary
To ensure that the configuration data between the M2000 and NEs is consistent, the M2000
supports manual and scheduled synchronization of configuration data. Users can view the
information about synchronization tasks.

Benefits
The M2000 provides manual and scheduled configuration data synchronization. The two
synchronization modes enable users to control the synchronization progress and ensure
that the configuration data between NEs and the M2000 is consistent.
The M2000 displays the detailed information about NE configuration data
synchronization on the GUI, facilitating tracing and review of the configuration data.

Description
This feature provides the following functions:
Synchronizing configuration data
The M2000 supports synchronizing configuration data manually or on a scheduled basis.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

39

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

In manual synchronization mode, users manually start a synchronization task on the


M2000 client. The M2000 updates and stores the data in the M2000 database based on the
current data obtained from NEs.
The M2000 synchronizes configuration based on the period and time set by users and the
range of NEs. If users do not set the period or time, the M2000 performs scheduled
synchronization tasks according to the default settings. Users can set synchronization
intervals by day. The intervals must be a multiple of one day. Scheduled synchronization
tasks are managed and scheduled by using the feature WOFD-071200 Centralized Task
Manager.
Browsing configuration task information
The M2000 displays, in a list, the current manual and scheduled data synchronization
information about all NEs managed by the M2000. The information listed includes the
start time, type, progress, and description of the synchronization. Users can also save the
information to a local PC as a file.
After the synchronization is started, the M2000 automatically records the synchronization.
After the synchronization is complete, the M2000 automatically deletes the record.
In addition, users can view the information about the latest manual or scheduled
configuration data synchronization. The M2000 displays, in a list, the execution
information about the latest configuration data synchronization of all the NEs managed by
the M2000. The list displays the information about the start and end time of the history
configuration data synchronization tasks, synchronization types, synchronization results,
and result details.

Enhancement
The function of browsing the information about manual and scheduled configuration
synchronization tasks is added to M2000 V200R008.

Dependency
None

WOFD-020400 Configuration Data Query


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Summary
The M2000 provides a window for viewing configuration data. It supports the functions of
searching for and exporting NE configuration data.

Benefits
The M2000 displays NE configuration data in a navigation tree and a table so that users can
easily view the logical relationships between configuration objects and detailed configuration
information.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

40

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Description
The M2000 displays NE configuration data in an interface that contains a navigation tree in the
left pane and a table in the right pane. The navigation tree displays NE configuration objects
and their logical relationships. The table displays the details about selected configuration
objects. The M2000 allows users to search for NE configuration data based on the keywords
contained in configuration object names. The M2000 also allows users to locate the search
results on the corresponding nodes in the navigation tree.
In the window for viewing configuration data, users can select an NE to export its configuration
data. The exported data can be saved as CSV and XML files.
In addition, the M2000 displays the common configuration data of some objects as labels in the
topology view. The common configuration data includes NE names, NE types, IP addresses,
current version information, link names, link types, and names of the NE nodes at both ends of
a link.

WOFD-020800 Object Management Status Monitor


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R003.

Description
The M2000 displays the information about and status of hardware and software resources on
the GUI, which allows users to learn about the network status in real time. Users can set the
range of the objects whose status is to be monitored. They can also add, delete, suspend, and
resume monitoring tasks. The M2000 supports sorting the monitoring results by the statuses
and names of NEs and objects.
Table 2-1 describes the resources and resource statuses that can be monitored by using this
feature.
Table 2-1 Object management status
NE Type

Object Type

Management Status

RNC

Cell

Administration status: unlocked, locked, shutting


down
Operating status: enable, disable
Activation status: activated and deactivated
Availability status: normal, faulty, intelligent
shutdown, intelligent RF channel shutdown, and
low-power consumption mode

NodeB node

Administration status: unlocked, locked, shutting


down
Takeover status: takeover, un-takeover

CN node

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

CN node status: normal, off-load, and inhibited

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

41

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

NE Type

Object Type

Management Status

BSC6900 UMTS

Cell

Administration status: unlocked, locked, shutting


down

BSC6900 GU

Operating status: enable, disable


Activation status: activated and deactivated
Availability status: normal, faulty, intelligent
shutdown, intelligent RF channel shutdown, and
low-power consumption mode
NodeB node

Administration status: unlocked, locked, shutting


down
Takeover status: takeover, un-takeover

CN node

CN node status: normal, off-load, and inhibited

Destination
signaling point
code (DPC)

Administration status: unlocked, locked, shutting


down

BSC6900 GSM

Cell

Operating status: enable, disable

BSC6900 GU

BTS node

Operating status: enable, disable

Destination
signaling point
code (DPC)

Administration status: unlocked, locked, shutting


down

Operating status: enable, disable

Operating status: enable, disable


DPC capability

eNodeB

Cell

Administration status: unlocked, locked, shutting


down
Operating status: enable, disable

eNodeB

License status: Default, Demo, Normal,


Protected, Emergency
Operating status: Starting, Software ready,
Software not ready

Board

Administration status: unlocked, locked, shutting


down
Operating status: enable, disable
Availability status: normal, fault, uninstalled,
un-configured, inconsistent, power-off
Usage status: idle, active, busy
Standby status: active, standby

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

42

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

NE Type

Object Type

Management Status

GGSN

Board

Administration status: unlocked, locked, shutting


down
Operating status: enable, disable
Availability status: normal, fault, uninstalled,
un-configured, inconsistent, power-off
Usage status: idle, active, busy
Standby status: active, standby

UGW

Board

Administration status: unlocked, locked, shutting


down
Operating status: enable, disable
Availability status: normal, fault, uninstalled,
un-configured, inconsistent, power-off
Usage status: idle, active, busy
Standby status: active, standby

MSC Server

Link

Operating status: enable, disable


Congestion status: un-congested, congested
Inhibited status: unblocked, locked, local locked,
remote locked, local and remote locked
Activation status: active, inactive
Release status: unreleased, released

SGSN

Link

Operating status: enable, disable


Congestion status: un-congested, congested
Inhibited status: unblocked, locked, local locked,
remote locked, local and remote locked
Activation status: active, inactive
Release status: unreleased, released

MGW

Link

Operating status: enable, disable


Congestion status: un-congested, congested
Inhibited status: unblocked, locked, local locked,
remote locked, local and remote locked
Activation status: active, inactive
Release status: unreleased, released

Enhancement
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R008:
Managing the status of the BSC6900 GSM SCCP DPC.
Board status management of the UGW.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

43

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

WOFD-020900 Link Status Report


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R003.

Description
Link status reports are essential in the case of link disconnections or uncertain alarm prompts.
This feature enables the M2000 to generate link status reports on a scheduled basis so that users
can easily learn about network link statuses and locate link exceptions in time.
The status reports of all the links of a selected NE can be displayed. The supported link
types vary according to NEs. Table 2-2 describes the link types supported by NEs.
Table 2-2 Link types supported by NEs
NE Type

Link Type

SGSN

MTP3/MTP3B/MTP3/MTP3B/NSVC

MSC Server

M3UA/H248/MTP3B/MTP3/BICCSCTP

RNC

PPP/ML-PPP/RNC PPP group/IPPATH/SCTP

BSC6900 GSM/BSC6900
GU/BSC6900 UMTS/BSC6000
(GSM-R)

PPP/ML-PPP/PPP group/IPPATH/SCTP

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R008:
Supporting MSC Server links such as the H248 and the M3UA

WOFD-021000 Local Device Panel


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R003.

Description
The device panel provided by the LMT of an NE displays the subracks, boards, configuration,
and alarms of NEs on the GUI. On the boards, users can perform common operations such as
querying board information and resetting boards.
After starting the LMT of a specified NE in the M2000 topology view and starting the device
panel, users can check the hardware status in the topology view or perform routine maintenance
of devices through shortcut menus.
To ensure security of data transmission between LMTs and NEs, LMTs based on the iView
platform support SSL-encrypted transmission, and web LMTs support HTTPS-encrypted
transmission.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

44

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Dependency
This feature is implemented on the LMT. If the NE LMT is based on the iView platform, users
must install the NE LMT on the M2000 client before using this feature. If the NE supports a
web LMT, users do not need to install the NE LMT.

WOFD-022300 Centralized Device Panel


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R008.

Summary
The M2000 provides the centralized device panel function and graphically displays subracks,
boards, and the status and alarm information about subracks and boards. On the device panel,
users can perform common operations such as querying board states and restarting boards.

Benefits
The graphical display of devices allows users to maintain NEs easily and improves the usability
of the M2000. By using this feature, users can directly view the hardware status of devices and
perform common operations on the device panel.

Description
The M2000 implements centralized device panel management, which allows users to switch
device panels of different NEs on the same GUI.
The device panel graphically displays the physical locations and states of racks, subracks, and
boards. In addition, the states can be updated in real time. The M2000 displays the following
board states: null, unknown, uninstalled, unconfigured, inconsistent, starting up, power off,
blocked normal, blocked faulty, faulty, active normal, standby normal, and abnormal
active/standby. The states are identified in different colors on the device panel. In addition, on
the device panel, users can learn about the running status of boards according to the indicators
of board states, fault bar, and the indicators of active alarms.
Users can right-click a board and perform common O&M operations through shortcut menus,
such as querying board status, alarms, CPU usage, inventory information, and resetting or
blocking the board. Board status varies according to the board type, and shortcut menus
supported by boards are slightly different.
The device panel provides shortcut menus for common maintenance, such as querying board
status, alarms, CPU usage, and inventory data, and resetting or blocking boards. The shortcut
menus vary according to board states.
If a BTS is configured with RRUs, the M2000 displays the physical topology relationships
between RRUs and between RRU and BBU ports by displaying the RRU device panel, RRU
chains, and CPRI connections. The physical network topology can be updated in real time,
showing the connection status and the device status on the topology.

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R012C01:

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

45

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Centralized device panel for the USU and eRelay


The following functions are added to M2000 V200R011C00:
Querying the inventory data on boards through the device panel
Displaying the topology of CPRIs
Centralized device panel for BTS3902E WCDMA (micro NodeB) and BTS3202E (micro
eNodeB)
The following function is added to M2000 V200R010:
Managing the SBC2600 device panel
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R009:
Displaying the device panel of the RRU
Displaying the device panels of BSC6900 GSM, BSC6900 UMTS, BSC6900 GU and
GBTS
Displaying the centralized device panels of 3900 series of GBTSs, including the BTS3900,
BTS3900A, and DBS3900
Displaying the centralized device panels of NodeBV2, including the DBS3900 WCDMA,
BTS3900 WCDMA, BTS3900A WCDM, and BTS3900L WCDMA

Dependency
This feature applies to eRAN1.0 and later versions.
This feature applies to SBC V200R008 and later versions.

WOFD-022000 Configuration Report


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R008.

Summary
The M2000 provides the NE report, core network resource report, NE statistics report, link
report, and RAN configuration report. Users can view the basic NE information, port resource
information, NE version information, link information, base station configuration information,
and cell configuration information presented by these reports through GUI. Users can also save
the reports to a local PC or print the reports.
In addition, the M2000 can periodically generate the configuration reports through centralized
task management.

Benefits
The M2000 provides various configuration reports according to configuration data types and
O&M scenarios. Therefore, users can easily learn about the NE information, port resource
information, link information, base station configuration information, and cell configuration
information. This improves O&M efficiency.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

46

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Description
The M2000 provides reports such as the RAN configuration report, core network resource
report, and link report. Users can view these reports through the GUI. In addition, users can
save the reports as XLS, CSV, TXT, PDF, or HTML files. They can also print the reports.
The configuration reports can be generated periodically through centralized task management.
Users can set the report generation period in the unit of day.
The data in each report is as follows:
NE report
An NE report contains basic NE information, such as NE names, types, versions, IP
addresses, physical locations, vendors, districts, maintenance areas, status of the
connection with the M2000, and capacity. The report also provides the total number of
NEs and the number of disconnected NEs by NE type.
NE statistics report
An NE statistics report allows users to query the version information about multiple NEs.
The version information includes the NE type, NE versions involved in each type of NE,
and number of NEs corresponding to each version.
Core network resource report
A core network resource report allows users to query the resource information about
multiple NEs. The resource information includes the NE name, NE type, number of 2
Mbit/s signaling ports, number of 2 Mbit/s trunk ports, number of 64 kbit/s signaling ports,
number of FE ports, number of GE ports, number of CPUs, and update time.
Link report
A link report allows users to query the link information about specified NEs. Only the
SGSN, MSC server, and RNC support link reports. Table 2-3 describes the mapping
between NE types and report types.
Table 2-3 Link types supported by NEs
NE Type

Link Report Type

SGSN

N7 link report, N7 route report, MTP3B link


report, NSVC report, and MTP3B route report

MSC Server

MTP3 link report and MTP3 route report

RNC/BSC6900 GSM/BSC6900
UMTS/BSC6900 GU

PPP link report, Multi-Link Point-to-Point


Protocol (MLPPP) link report, PPP group link
report, IPPATH link report, and SCTP signaling
link report

RAN configuration report


Users can view the configuration reports of a specified RAN. WRAN configuration
reports contain the configuration reports of NodeBs and cells. GBSS configuration reports
contain the configuration reports of GBTSs, cells, neighboring cells, external cells, TRXs,
and channels. These reports provide an easy way for users to learn about the statuses of
network resources.
In WRAN configuration reports, the NodeB configuration report includes NodeB ID,
NodeB name, NodeB type, subsystem No., RNC name, and NCP SAAL link No.. The cell
configuration report includes cell ID, cell name, RNC name, NodeB ID, NodeB name,

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

47

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

location area code (LAC), Service Area Code (SAC), routing area code (RAC), uplink
frequency, downlink frequency, and maximum transmit power.
In GBSS configuration reports, the BTS configuration report includes the name, index,
type, and transfer mode of the BTS. The cell configuration report includes the name and
index of cell and BTS, CGI, BCC, and NCC. The carrier configuration report includes
BTS name and index, cell index, TRX index, cabinet No., frame No., slot No., board type,
active state, frequency, level and type of power, TCH rate adjust allow, receive mode, and
send mode. The channel report includes No. and type of channel, name and index of BTS,
cell index, frequency index, hop index, hopping sequence No., training sequence code,
and mobile allocation index offset (MAIO). The neighboring cell configuration report
includes BTS name, cell index, neighboring 2G cell index, PBGT HO threshold, minimum
access level offset, and BQ HO margin. The external cell configuration report includes
BTS name, base station color code (BCC), NCC, index and name of cell, cell CI, MCC,
MNC, inter-layer HO threshold, penalty on fast moving HO, minimum DL level on
candidate cell, and cell priority.
All the NEs support the NE report and NE statistics report. Some NEs support core
network resource report, link report, and RAN configuration report. For details, see the
"Dependency" part.

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R012C00:
Information about NE maintenance areas and connection status with the M2000 is added
to an NE report.
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R009:
NE report, core network resource report, NE statistics report, and link report.
Various configuration reports can be automatically generated by using centralized task
management.

Dependency
The MGW and MSC server support the core network resource report.
The SGSN, MSC server, BSC6900 GSM, BSC6900 UMTS, BSC6900 GU, and RNC support
the link report.
The RNC, NodeB, BSC6900 GSM, BSC6900 UMTS, BSC6900 GU, and GBTS support the
RAN configuration report.

WOFD-021400 Dual Homing Configuration Management


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R005.

Description
The dual-homing is a disaster tolerance mechanism that prevents the disconnection of mobile
network services in the managed domain due to MSC Server, UGC or UAC system breakdown
or system faults. This ensures that mobile networks are running securely and reliably.
The following description is based on the MSC Server, which also supports the UGC and UAC.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

48

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

In dual-homing networking mode, one MGW is controlled by two MSC Servers. The two MSC
Servers are referred to as a dual-homing pair. Normally, each MGW is registered only on the
active MSC Server. When the active MSC Server is faulty, the MGW can be registered on the
standby MSC Server to ensure the continuous and normal network communication services.
The active and standby MSC Servers check the status of each other through heartbeats.
The M2000 can automatically detect dual-homing relationships and displays the relationships
in the topology view.
As one type of the basic data of the MSC Server, dual-homing data is used to define virtual
nodes, working modes, heartbeat links, and backup routes of dual-homing. The M2000
supports the consistency check of dual-homing data and generates comparison reports. Based
on the check results, the M2000 can generate an MML adjustment script to modify inconsistent
NE data. Users can manually send and run scripts on NEs to ensure the data consistency
between dual-homing MSC Servers.
Users can send MML commands to one MSC Server or to both MSC Servers of a dual-homing
pair.

WOFD-022100 Basic Configuration of CS Domain


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R005.

Description
A circuit switched (CS) domain is a set of the CN entities that provide CS domain services on
mobile networks. This feature allows users to configure CS domains based on the configuration
navigation tree.

Benefits
The M2000 provides the graphical configuration function, which allows users to view and
configure the configuration data of CS NEs and their MOs.

Description
The M2000 provides a configuration navigation tree to display the logical relationships
between each NE and its MOs on the CS network. The M2000 displays the property parameters
of each MO on the interface that contains a navigation tree in the left pane and a table in the
right pane. The MOs such as circuits and links are the basic units configured on the CS network.
The basic CS navigation configuration supports the following functions:
Viewing configuration data: Users can view the configuration data of each NE and its
MOs in the CS domain. In addition, users can sort the viewing results.
Configuring NE data: On the interface for viewing configuration data, users can adjust the
NE configuration data, such as adding MOs, deleting MOs, and modifying the property
parameters. These operations can be performed in batches.
Viewing configuration operation records: When users adjust CS network parameters
through the M2000, the M2000 automatically records and displays user operations.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

49

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

WOFD-070200 Centralized MML for Configuration


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Summary
This feature allows users to concurrently send MML commands and MML scripts to multiple
NEs on the M2000 client.

Description
The centralized command-line feature allows users to send MML commands to multiple NEs of
the same type on the M2000 client. The CLI provides a command navigation tree organized by
function, supports the predictive input technique and help information, and records executed
commands. It also allows users to filter, search for, and sort NEs. Before executing a command
that may have severe negative effects, the M2000 displays a message, informing users of the
possible execution results. The M2000 executes the command only after users confirm the
operation.
The M2000 displays the execution results of MML commands on a GUI in real time. It also
provides a result redirection function so that users can directly save the command execution
results in a file.
MML commands can be processed in batches. To implement this, users edit the MML
commands to be executed in MML scripts, import the scripts to the M2000, and create a
centralized task to deliver the scripts to NEs. After a script is executed, the M2000 provides
statistics about the execution, including the number of successfully executed MML commands,
number of unsuccessfully executed MML commands, and list of unsuccessfully executed MML
commands.
The M2000 centrally manages and schedules script tasks by using the feature WOFD-071200
Centralized Task Manager. When creating a task, users need to specify a script and set the
execution mode (immediate execution or scheduled execution), running mode, redirection of
the script result and NEs. According to the preset time, the M2000 sends the MML commands
in sequence in the script to the selected NE or multiple NEs of the same type. If required, user
can cancel the task during its execution.

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R011C00:
The M2000 displays a message, which indicates the possible execution results before
executing an MML command that may have severe negative effects.
The following function is added to M2000 V200R010:
The M2000 provides the statistical information about the task execution after an MML
script task is completed.

Dependency
Only GGSNV9R7C01 and earlier releases support this feature.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

50

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

2.4 CME
The CME features are modified in M2000 V200R012 for users to easily use and read. Basic
CME features are combined based on configuration scenarios, and some optional features are
changed to basic features. The following table describes the mapping between features in
M2000 V200R012 and M2000 V200R011.
Feature ID and Name Before Optimization

Feature ID and Name


After Optimization

WOFD-181500 Management of the Current and Planned Area

WOFD-186000 CME
Basic Service

WOFD-182500 Automatic Discovery of RNCs and NodeBs


WRAN
WOFD-265400 Automatic Discovery of BSCs and BTSs
GBSS
WOFD-181600 Data Browse and Search
WOFD-181700 Script Executor
WOFD-183100 NodeB Configuration Template WRAN
WOFD-265700 BTS Configuration Template GBSS
WOFD-181514 eNodeB Configuration Template LTE
WOFD-260600 Cell Template Management GBSS
WOFD-184100 Cell Template Management WRAN
WOFD-188004 Cell Template Management LTE
WOFD-265200 CME Device Panel GBSS
WOFD-265600 Negotiated Data of batch BTS Creation GBSS

WOFD-186100
Network Initial
Configuration GBSS

WOFD-266700 BTS Creation GBSS


WOFD-266000 Configuration of Neighboring Cell Relations
GBSS
WOFD-266100 Import and Export of the Radio Network
Planning Data GBSS
WOFD-265100 Device Data Configuration GBSS
WOFD-265200 CME Device Panel GBSS
WOFD-265500 Basic Configuration of Transmission Data
GBSS

WOFD-186110
Network
Reconfiguration
GBSS

WOFD-265800 Basic Configuration of Abis GBSS


WOFD-261200 Abis Timeslots Advanced Configuration
GBSS
WOFD-266400 Wizard for Batch Configuration of BTS
Parameters GBSS

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

51

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Feature ID and Name Before Optimization

Feature ID and Name


After Optimization

WOFD-266500 Wizard for Batch Configuration of TRX


Parameters GBSS
WOFD-265900 Basic Configuration of Cells GBSS
WOFD-266000 Configuration of Neighboring Cell Relations
GBSS
WOFD-185910 Interlocked Modification of Cell Parameters
GBSS
WOFD-266100 Import and Export of the Radio Network
Planning Data GBSS
WOFD-266200 Import and Export of the Radio Network
Optimization Data GBSS
WOFD-266300 Wizard for Batch Configuration of Cell
Parameters GBSS
WOFD-266800 BTS Reparenting in a Single BSC GBSS
WOFD-266600 Data Integrity Check in a Single BSC GBSS

WOFD-186120
Parameter Consistency
Check GBSS

WOFD-182400 CME Device Panel WRAN

WOFD-186200
Network Initial
Configuration WRAN

WOFD-183000 Import and Export of the Interface Negotiated


Data WRAN
WOFD-184000 IUB Transmission Configuration Wizard
WRAN
WOFD-183900 NodeB Configuration Express WRAN
WOFD-183600 Batch Configuration of Radio Parameters
WRAN
WOFD-183500 Import and Export of the Radio Network
Planning Data WRAN
WOFD-182300 Device Data Configuration WRAN
WOFD-182400 CME Device Panel WRAN
WOFD-182600 RNC Pool Management WRAN

WOFD-186210
Network
Reconfiguration
WRAN

WOFD-182700 RNC MOCN Management WRAN


WOFD-182800 Basic Configuration of Transmission Data
WRAN
WOFD-183000 Import and Export of the Interface Negotiated
Data WRAN

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

52

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Feature ID and Name Before Optimization

Feature ID and Name


After Optimization

WOFD-182900 Batch Configuration of the Objects Related to


Transmission Properties WRAN
WOFD-183800 NodeB Network Topology WRAN
WOFD-183900 NodeB Configuration Express WRAN
WOFD-183200 Basic Configuration of Cells WRAN
WOFD-183300 Configuration of Neighboring Cell Relations
WRAN
WOFD-185900 Interlocked Modification of Cell Parameters
WRAN
WOFD-183500 Import and Export of the Radio Network
Planning Data WRAN
WOFD-185700 Import and Export of the Radio Network
Optimization Data WRAN
WOFD-183600 Batch Configuration of Radio Parameters
WRAN
WOFD-183700 Wizard for Batch Configuration of Radio
Parameters WRAN
WOFD-184200 Cell Frequency Re-configuration Wizard
WRAN
WOFD-187000 Data Integrity Check in a Single RNC WRAN

WOFD-186220
Parameter Consistency
Check WRAN

WOFD-181512 CME Device Panel LTE

WOFD-186300
Network Initial
Configuration LTE

WOFD-181520 Import and Export of the Interface Negotiated


Data LTE
WOFD-181515 eNodeB Creation LTE
WOFD-181518 Import and Export of the Radio Network
Planning Data LTE
WOFD-181511 Device Data Configuration LTE
WOFD-181512 CME Device Panel LTE

WOFD-186310
Network
Reconfiguration LTE

WOFD-181513 Basic Configuration of Transmission Data


LTE
WOFD-181520 Import and Export of the Interface Negotiated
Data LTE
WOFD-181516 Basic Configuration of Cells LTE

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

53

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Feature ID and Name


After Optimization

Feature ID and Name Before Optimization


WOFD-181518 Import and Export of the Radio Network
Planning Data LTE
WOFD-181517 Wizard for Batch Configuration of Radio
Parameters LTE
WOFD-188008 MBTS Creation SingleRAN

WOFD-186400
Network Initial
Configuration
SingleRAN

SingleRAN
WOFD-185300 CME MBTS Device Panel SingleRAN
WOFD-185600 MBTS Configuration Management
WOFD-185200 CME MBSC Device Panel

SingleRAN

WOFD-185100 Common Resource Consistency Check


SingleRAN

WOFD-186410
Network
Reconfiguration
SingleRAN

WOFD-186420
Parameter Consistency
Check SingleRAN

WOFD-186000 Basic CME Service


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R010.

Summary
The Configuration Management Express (CME) is an M2000's configuration solution for radio
access technology (RAT) networks. It provides configuration data for NEs in wizard-, template-,
and GUI-based modes.

Benefits
This feature brings about the following benefits:
With this feature, data on the live network is assigned to the current data area, and
user-configured data is assigned to planned data areas. This allows multiple engineers to
configure data in different planned data areas and ensures operation security.
Users can easily configure data by using the flexible data browsing and search functions.
Users can organize scripts as projects, and deliver and modify the projects on GUIs. They
do not need to perform script-based tasks such as manually selecting NEs, scripts,
execution policies, and dependencies. This improves operation accuracy.
Template and filter management helps users create base stations, cells, and neighboring
cells, compare parameters, trace configuration parameter changes, and apply templates.
This simplifies user operations and improves O&M efficiency.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

54

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Description
Basic CME services include the following functions:
Managing the current and planned data areas
Current data area:
A current data area mirrors the data on the live network. A radio access network (RAN) has
only one current data area. Data in the current data area is read-only.
Planned data area:
A planned data area is a replication of the current data area. Multiple users can plan
configuration data of the same NE in their own planned data areas. Before a user activates
the data in a planned data area, neither the data on the live network nor that in any other
planned data area is affected.
Planned data areas are categorized into public and private planned data areas. A public
planned data area is available to users in the user group to which the creator belongs while
a private planned data area is available only to the creator and administrators. A CME
system supports up to 90 planned data areas.
Using attribute value changes (AVCs) to notify users of data changes in the current data
area
AVCs on the live network are sent to users in real time to notify users of configuration data
changes. The CME AVC stores configuration data changes for seven days so users can
query them. The queried configuration data changes can be exported as HTML, CSV, XLS,
XLSX, PDF, or TXT files.
Synchronizing data in the current data area

Manual synchronization: Users can manually synchronize data in the current data area
with data on the live network.

Automatic synchronization: After the configuration data about NEs is modified, the
CME automatically synchronizes data in the current data area with data on the live
network.

Scheduled synchronization: The CME synchronizes data in the current data area based
on tasks. It manages and schedules the tasks based on the feature WOFD-071200
Centralized Task Manager.

Highlighting and exporting modified data in planned data areas


When users modify data in a planned data area, the CME highlights the added, modified,
and deleted configuration data.
In addition, the CME provides a modification report, which records the configuration data
in the planned data area before and after the modification. The modification report can be
exported as an HTML file.
Undoing data changes in planned data areas
After a planned data area is created or synchronized with the current data area and before
the data is exported as scripts, data modification operations (excluding NE addition and
deletion) can be undone step by step within this period.
Dumping planned data areas
A planned data area that is idle for a long time can be dumped from the database to a file,
releasing database space and improving system performance. After being dumped, the
planned data area can still be opened or deleted. Planned data areas can be automatically or
manually dumped.
Checking for conflicting data in a planned data area

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

55

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

When users configure data in a planned data area, data on the live network may change. As
a result, activating the configuration data in the planned data area may fail because of data
conflicts. To solve this problem, the CME provides a data check mechanism. This
mechanism allows users to compare the configuration data between the planned and
current data areas and locate conflicts before activating configuration data. After finding
conflicting data, users can modify the data in the planned data area based on data check
results. This ensures data consistency and improves the success rate of data activation.
Conflicting data can be exported as a report in HTML format.
Browsing data in the configuration navigation tree
The configuration navigation tree consists of a tree in the left pane and a table in the right
pane. The CME displays all configuration objects and parameters in the configuration
navigation tree for users to add, delete, and modify them.
Data browse in the configuration navigation tree consists of the following subfunctions:

Data filter: After a user enters certain filter criteria, the CME automatically filters out
the data that meets the preset criteria.

Field display: Users can determine whether to display a field. By doing this, they can
view key information clearly.

Data locating: After a user enters a field name, the CME automatically locates the
column of the field.

Data export: The CME allows users to export the displayed data as a TXT file.

Record counting: The CME allows users to view the total number of records in a table.

Searching for data globally


Global data search allows users to search for base stations and cells. A user can search the
entire network for specific base stations or cells by base station ID, base station name, cell
ID, cell name, or cell type. Fuzzy search is also supported.
Using a script executor
After a user has configured data in a planned data area, the CME generates configuration
scripts (in XML or MML format) based on all the data reconfiguration. Then, it delivers
the scripts to NEs as a project by using the script executor. Users can process multiple NEs
concurrently. They can create a maximum of 200 projects, each project containing one or
more tasks, and each task mapping one configuration script.
The script executor provides the following functions:

Creating a project

Deleting a project

Pre-activating a project: Users can pre-activate a project to check script accuracy.

Activating a project: Users can make the configuration scripts in a project take effect
on NEs.

Canceling an operation being performed on a project

Suspending or resuming a project

Activating a project on schedule

Monitoring the status of a project

Viewing script execution results

There are two script execution modes:

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Break on failure: Script activation stops immediately when an error occurs. The
activation resumes only after the error is rectified.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

56

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Best effort: If an error occurs during the activation of a configuration script, the script
executor ignores the error and continues to activate other data. After the activation is
complete, all the incorrect configuration data is submitted to users for rectification.

Managing templates
The CME provides various templates and template management functions that help users
prepare configuration data. Templates are in XML format and are associated with NE
versions.
The CME provides templates for controllers, base stations, cells, neighboring cells,
external cells, frequencies, transport parameters, and radio parameters. Different NEs
support different types of template.
With the template management functions, users can perform the following operations:

Customizing templates: Users can save data on the live network as templates.

Importing and exporting templates: CME templates can be exported as XML files, and
XML files can be imported.

Deleting templates: User-defined templates can be deleted.

Setting template rights: A template creator can specify a user group for each template.
Members of the user group can use this template.

Viewing templates: Users can view the configuration objects and parameters in various
templates.

Editing templates: Users can modify configuration parameters in various templates and
save the parameters in the current or other templates.

Upgrading templates: Users can upgrade a template from a source version to a target
version. This function applies only to GBTSs, eNodeBs, and NodeBs.

Replacing templates: Users can replace an existing template by typing new cabinet and
subrack numbers in it. This function applies only to eNodeBs.

Filtering parameters
Operations such as comparing parameters, tracing parameter changes, and applying
templates involve a large number of parameters. To facilitate operations, the CME
provides default filters and allows users to define filters so that the CME quickly filters out
required parameters.
The CME provides the following filter management functions:

Customizing filters: Users can select configuration objects and parameters, and save
them as a filter.

Editing filters: Users modify configuration parameters of various filters and save the
parameters in the current or other filters.

Importing and exporting filters: Users can export filter files as XML files or import
XML filter files into the CME.

Deleting filters: Users can delete user-defined filters.

Enhancement
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R012C00:
Supporting external cell templates on LTE networks
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R011C00:
Supporting Iur, Iu-CS, and Iu-PS transport parameter templates
Highlighting new, modified, and deleted configuration data in planned data areas

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

57

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Undoing data changes in planned data areas

Dependency
Excel 2003, Excel 2007, or Excel 2010 must be installed on the PC running the CME client.
Users must purchase and install Microsoft Office in advance.

WOFD-186100 Network Initial Configuration GBSS


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R010.

Summary
Network initial configuration is performed at the deployment phase for GSM networks. Initial
configuration ensures that devices run properly and provide required service capability. Objects
to be configured are BSCs and BTSs.
After a BSC is connected to the M2000, users can configure the global data, device data, and
transport data about the BSC by using the configuration navigation tree, device panel, or
negotiated interface data import-export function. They can create BTSs, TRXs, and cells in the
BTS topology view or by using the interface data batch import function. They can also create
neighbor relationships by using the configuration navigation tree or network planning data
batch import function.

Benefits
This feature brings about the following benefits:
Convenient and flexible modes for network initial configuration based on the scenario
Simplified site deployment and improved site deployment efficiency
Bidirectional neighbor relationships that ensure configuration data consistency

Description
The following parameters are configured during BSC initial configuration:
BSC global parameters
BSC global parameters are the parameters that take effect on the entire BSC, such as the
originating signaling point (OSP), destination signaling point (DSP), clock, and timer.
BSC global parameters are configured in the configuration navigation tree.
The configuration navigation tree, also known as a configuration express, consists of a tree
in the left pane and a table in the right pane. The CME displays all configuration objects
and parameters in the configuration navigation tree for users to add, delete, and modify
them.
BSC device parameters
BSC device parameters are the parameters about physical devices such as cabinets,
subracks, and boards. BSC device parameters are essential for carrying upper-layer
service data. Device parameters are configured on a device panel.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

58

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

The device panel displays the components of BSC physical devices. Users can view
component attributes on the device panel. They can also add, delete, and modify
parameters about the physical devices.
BSC transport parameters
BSC transport parameters are interface parameters that ensure proper data transmission
between NEs. The interfaces include the A, Ater, Gb, Pb, and Iur-g interfaces.
Users can configure BSC transport parameters by using the configuration navigation tree
or configure BSC transport parameters in batches by importing negotiated data about the
A, Ater, and Gb interfaces.
The CME allows users to create a single BTS or create BTS in batches:
Creating a single BTS in the topology view
The CME provides a BTS topology view that displays the networking relationships,
physical connections, and information about the ports between the BSC and the BTS or
between BTSs.
In the BTS topology view, users can perform the following data configuration operations:

Create a BTS: Users can create a BTS object in the BTS topology view by using a BTS
template and configure BTS basic parameters.

Configure BTS device parameters: On the device panel, users can configure
parameters about devices such as cabinets, boards, RF modules, and power modules.

Configure BTS transport parameters: For a TDM-based BTS, users can configure
secondary chains and Abis interface timeslots in the BTS topology view. For an
IP-based BTS, users can configure parameters such as IP attributes, IP addresses, and
IP routes in the configuration navigation tree.

Create cells: In the BTS topology view, users can create cells by using cell templates
and configure cell basic parameters, FH group, and hopping antenna groups.

Create TRXs: In the BTS topology view, users can add TRXs and configure TRX
attributes.

Check and activate a BTS.

Creating BTSs in batches


The CME allows users to create BTSs in batches by using either of the following
functions:

Importing a negotiated BTS data file


The CME allows users to create BTSs, TRXs, and cells in batches by importing a
negotiated BTS data template that references BTS templates and cell templates. In this
mode, a maximum of 50 BTSs can be created at a time.
A BTS negotiated interface data template is an XLS or XLSM file that records the
following data for BTS creation: BTS basic parameters, BTS transport parameters, cell
basic parameters, and TRX basic parameters.

Importing a summary data file


The CME allows users to quickly create BTSs, TRXs, and cells in batches and add
neighboring cells and external cells at the same time by importing data using a default
or user-defined summary data file. In this mode, a maximum of 50 BTSs can be created
at a time.
A summary data file is an XLS or XLSM file that contains planned data required for
creating BTSs in batches. It contains the following data: BTS basic parameters,
transport parameters, cell basic parameters, information about neighboring GSM,
UMTS, and LTE cells and external cells, and IBCA neighboring cell groups. When a

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

59

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

summary data file is used, it references a BTS template and cell template. The file and
templates simplify data editing during BTS creation.
The CME provides a tool for customizing summary data files. Using this tool, users
can customize objects and parameters required for BTS creation. For example, users
can design the data file and edit NE configuration objects and the mappings between
data in the file.
The CME allows users to create neighbor relationships in the following modes:
Configuring neighbor relationships in the configuration navigation tree
In the configuration navigation tree, users can add or delete neighboring GSM, UMTS,
and LTE cells in batches for GSM cells by referencing neighbor relationship templates.
The CME also allows users to configure bidirectional neighbor relationships for GSM and
UMTS cells to ensure that MSs are properly handed over between these cells.
Importing network planning data in batches
By importing network planning data, users can create neighbor relationships in batches. A
network planning template is an XLS, XLSM, or TXT file that contains user-planned data
about neighboring GSM, UMTS, and LTE relationships, external cells, and IBCA
neighboring cell groups. The CME also allows users to configure bidirectional neighbor
relationships for GSM, UMTS, and LTE cells to ensure that MSs are properly handed over
between these cells.

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R011C01:
Importing and exporting negotiated Gb interface data
The following function is added to M2000 V200R011C00:
Customizing summary data files

Dependency
Excel 2003, Excel 2007, or Excel 2010 must be installed on the PC running the CME client.
Users must purchase and install Microsoft Office in advance.

WOFD-186110 Network Reconfiguration GBSS


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R010.

Summary
Network reconfiguration applies to network expansion and routine maintenance scenarios.
Users need to reconfigure the device data, transport data, and radio data about BSCs and BTSs
in the following modes: configuration navigation tree, device panel, batch modification center,
planned data import-export, and interlocked modification.

Benefits
This feature brings about the following benefits:

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

60

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Graphical reconfiguration modes simplify data reconfiguration procedures and ensure


data correctness.
The batch modification center and planned data import-export function significantly
improve data reconfiguration efficiency.
Interlocked modification and bidirectional neighbor relationships ensure data consistency
across the entire network.

Description
The CME provides the following network reconfiguration modes:
Configuration navigation tree: It is also known as a configuration express. It consists of a
tree in the left pane and a table in the right pane. The CME displays all configuration
objects and parameters in the configuration navigation tree for users to add, delete, and
modify them.
Device panel: The device panel displays the components of BSC physical devices. Users
can view component attributes on the device panel. They can also add, delete, and modify
parameters about the physical devices.
Batch modification center: The CME allows users to change the values of parameters in
batches under a specified object for BSCs of the same version in the planned data area.
BTS topology view: The BTS topology view displays the networking relationships,
physical connections, and information about the ports between BTSs and BSCs or
between BTSs. In this view, users can perform operations such as configuring cells, TRXs,
and Abis timeslots.
The configuration wizard presents users with a sequence of dialog boxes that lead users
with a series of well-defined steps. In the configuration wizard, correlated operations such
as deleting cells in batches, configuring the ring network, Abis bypass mode, BTS
multiplexing ratio, and Flex Abis assignment mode are easy to perform.
Planned data import-export: The CME allows users to batch-configure objects and
parameters by importing and exporting a data planning template for onsite network
planning and network optimization data. Users can import and export network planning
data, cell parameters, neighboring cell BA data, cell frequency data, and TRX parameters.
Interlocked modification: In routine maintenance scenarios such as frequency
optimization, frequency refarming, and LAC optimization, users need to adjust cell
parameters such as LACs, BCCs, NCCs, and BCCHs. When users modify cell parameters
in the configuration navigation tree, batch modification center, or planned data
import-export mode, the CME automatically triggers interlocked modification for external
cell parameters under GSM, UMTS, and LTE NEs. This ensures parameter consistency.
Network reconfiguration involves device data, transport data, and radio data.
Reconfiguring device data:
Reconfiguring BSC device parameters

Reconfiguring BSC global parameters in Configuration Navigation Tree mode or


Batch Modification Center mode
In the configuration navigation tree, users can reconfigure BSC global parameters such
as the OSP, DSP, clock, and timer.
In the batch modification center, users can batch-reconfigure common BSC global
parameters such as the basic attributes, timer parameters, and clock mode.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Reconfiguring BSC device parameters in Device Panel mode

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

61

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

On the device panel, users can reconfigure parameters about BSC devices such as
cabinets, subracks, and boards. These parameters are essential for carrying upper-layer
data.
Reconfiguring BTS device parameters

Reconfiguring basic BTS parameters in Configuration Navigation Tree mode or Batch


Modification Center mode
In the configuration navigation tree, users can reconfigure BTS basic parameters such
as BTS name, clock type, transmission mode, and alarm attributes.
In the batch modification center, users can batch-reconfigure common BTS basic
parameters such as clock type, alarm attributes, and extended attributes.

Reconfiguring BTS device parameters in Device Panel mode


On the device panel, users can reconfigure parameters about BTS devices such as
cabinets and boards. These parameters are essential for carrying upper-layer data.

Reconfiguring transport data:


Reconfiguring BSC transport parameters in Configuration Navigation Tree mode
In the configuration navigation tree, users can reconfigure BSC transport parameters
such as A, Ater, Gb, Pb, and Iur-g interface data. This ensures proper transmission
between NEs.
Reconfiguring BTS transport parameters:

Reconfiguring BTS transmission modes using in Configuration Wizard mode


This wizard allows users to change the BTS transmission mode from TDM to IP over
E1, from TDM to IP over FE, from IP over E1 to IP over FE, from TDM to the backup
of IP over E1 and IP over FE, from IP over E1 to the backup of IP over E1 and IP over
FE, and from IP over FE to the backup of IP over E1 and IP over FE.

Reconfiguring transport parameters for IP-based BTSs in Configuration Navigation


Tree mode
In the configuration navigation tree, users can reconfigure BTS transport parameters
such as IP attributes, IP addresses, and IP routes. This ensures proper transmission
between Abis interfaces.

Reconfiguring transport parameters for TDM-based BTSs in BTS Topology View


mode or Configuration Wizard mode
The BTS topology view provides a configuration wizard, allowing users to configure
BTS transport parameters such as secondary chain, ring network, Abis bypass mode,
BTS multiplexing ratio, and Flex Abis assignment mode. This ensures proper
transmission between Abis interfaces.

Reconfiguring timeslots for TDM-based BTSs in BTS Topology View mode


In the BTS topology view, users can view the status of Abis timeslots under a BTS,
such as assigned timeslots, idle timeslots, monitoring timeslots, forbidden timeslots,
OML timeslots, transparent transmission timeslots, and manually allocated timeslots.
In addition, the CME allows users to collect and export statistics about the Abis E1
timeslot resource file for TDM-based BTSs across the entire network. When assigning
timeslots, users can reference the statistics, which consist of the E1 port usage and
timeslot resources for TDM-based interfaces boards and BTSs. The exported files are
in XLS, XLSM, CSV, or TXT format.

Intra-BSC BTS reparenting


The CME provides a reparenting function. By using this function, users can reconfigure
BTS connection attributes according to site requirements. Then, the CME automatically
completes the reconfiguration process. During intra-BSC BTS reparenting, the logical
Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

62

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

homing relationships between the BTSs and the BSC and relationships between cells and
neighboring cells under these BTSs remain unchanged. Therefore, the CME automatically
ensures the consistency of neighbor relationships. A maximum number of 50 BTSs can be
reparented at a time under one BSC.
Reconfiguring radio data:
Expanding cell capacity and reconfiguring data

Creating and deleting cells in BTS Topology View or Batch Cell Deletion Wizard
mode
In the BTS topology view, users can add cells for a specified BTS and to set cell basic
parameters based on the planned data. This ensures radio area coverage for cells under
the BTS.
Users can delete cells in batches under controllers of the same version. When deleting
cells, they can also delete their external cells and neighboring cells under GSM, UMTS,
and LTE NEs inside the planned data area.

Reconfiguring cell parameters in Configuration Navigation Tree mode, Batch


Modification Center mode, Cell Parameter Import-Export mode, or Interlocked
Modification mode
In the configuration navigation tree, users can reconfigure cell algorithm parameters
such as cell basic parameters, idle mode, and parameters related to call control,
handover control, power control, and channel management. Cell algorithm parameters
can also be reconfigured in batches in batch modification center mode or cell parameter
import-export mode.

Reconfiguring frequency-refarming parameters in BTS Topology View mode or Cell


Frequency Data Import-Export mode
By reconfiguring cell FH groups in the BTS topology view, users can implement
network optimization, frequency multiplexing, and interference balancing.
By importing and exporting cell frequency data, users can configure frequencies and
FH attributes in batches. Cell frequency data includes cell basic attributes, cell
frequencies, TRX frequencies, TRX FH mode, channel FH mode, and FH groups.

Reconfiguring parameters in the cell BA table in BTS Topology View mode or


Neighboring Cell BA Data Import-Export mode
By reconfiguring parameters in the cell BA table in the BTS topology view, users can
configure neighboring cells properly.
By importing and exporting of neighboring cell BA parameters, users can reconfigure
cell BA tables in batches. Neighboring cell BA tables are BA1 and BA2 tables for
neighboring GSM, TDD, and FDD cells.

Reconfiguring TRX parameters

Creating and deleting TRXs in BTS Topology View mode


TRXs are used for transmitting and receiving radio signals between BTSs and MSs.
When the network capacity is insufficient, users can add TRXs for specific cells in the
BTS topology view, configure TRX parameters, and activate the TRXs. This improves
the capability for transmitting and receiving radio signals and expands the network
capacity.

Reconfiguring TRX parameters in Configuration Navigation Tree mode, Batch


Modification Center mode, or TRX Parameter Import-Export mode
In the configuration navigation tree, users can reconfigure TRX parameters such as
TRX power, TRX attributes, channel type, and channel attributes. By doing this, users
can replan network frequencies, reduce intra-frequency and neighboring frequency
interference, optimize frequencies across the entire network, and therefore optimize

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

63

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

performance counters. These parameters can also be reconfigured in batches in batch


modification center mode or TRX parameter import-export mode.
Reconfiguring neighbor relationships and external cell parameters in Configuration
Navigation Tree mode or Network Planning Data Import-Export mode
In the configuration navigation tree, users can add or delete neighboring GSM, UMTS,
and LTE cells in batches for GSM cells by referencing neighbor relationship templates.
The CME also allows users to configure bidirectional neighbor relationships for GSM and
UMTS cells to ensure that MSs are properly handed over between these cells.
By importing network planning data, users can create neighbor relationships in batches.
The CME verifies the data before the import and provides a report after the import. A
network planning template is an XLS, XLSM, or TXT file that contains user-planned data
about neighboring GSM, UMTS, and LTE relationships, external cells, and IBCA
neighboring cell groups. The CME also allows users to configure bidirectional neighbor
relationships for GSM, UMTS, and LTE cells to ensure that MSs are properly handed over
between these cells.

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R012C00:
Supporting interlocked modification for cell parameters with eNodeBs
Reconfiguring BTS transmission modes using in Configuration Wizard mode
The following function is added to M2000 V200R011C00:
Supporting interlocked modification for cell parameters with UMTS NEs
Deleting cells in batches

Dependency
Excel 2003, Excel 2007, or Excel 2010 must be installed on the PC running the CME
client. Users must purchase and install Microsoft Office in advance.
Reconfiguring BTS transmission modes using in Configuration Wizard mode needs the
customized software and dedicated services of Huawei which are not included in this
feature.

WOFD-186200 Network Initial Configuration WRAN


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R010.

Summary
Network initial configuration is performed at the deployment phase for UMTS networks. Initial
configuration ensures that devices run properly and provide required service capability. After
an RNC is connected to the M2000, users can configure the global, device, and transport data
about the RNC by using the configuration navigation tree or device panel provided by the CME,
or by importing negotiated interface data in batches. They can create NodeBs and cells on GUIs
or create them in batches by importing interface data. They can also create neighbor
relationships by using the configuration navigation tree or by importing network planning data
in batches.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

64

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Benefits
This feature brings about the following benefits:
Convenient and flexible modes for network initial configuration based on the scenario
Simplified site deployment and improved site deployment efficiency
Bidirectional neighbor relationship configuration for ensuring configuration data
consistency

Description
The following parameters are configured during RNC initial configuration:
RNC global parameters
RNC global parameters are parameters on the entire RNC, such as the telecom operator
information, system information, clock mode, time zone information, OSP, and
transmission resource mapping (TRM) information. BSC global parameters are
configured in the configuration navigation tree.
The configuration navigation tree, also known as a configuration express, consists of a tree
in the left pane and a table in the right pane. The CME displays all configuration objects
and parameters in the configuration navigation tree for users to add, delete, and modify
them.
RNC device parameters
RNC device parameters are the parameters about physical devices such as cabinets,
subracks, and boards. RNC device parameters are the basis for carrying upper-layer
service data. Device parameters are configured on a device panel.
RNC transport parameters
RNC transport parameters are interface parameters that ensure proper data transmission
between NEs. The interfaces include Iur, Iu-CS, Iu-PS, Iu-BC, Iu-PC, Gi, and Iur-g
interfaces.
Users can configure RNC transport parameters by using the configuration navigation tree
or configure Iur, Iu-CS, and Iu-PS interface data in batches by importing negotiated data
about the Iu/Iur interfaces.
RNC radio global algorithm parameters
RNC radio global algorithm parameters are parameters on the entire RNC, such as the
flow control switch, load control, direct retry algorithm parameters, handover algorithm
parameters, channel management parameters, and MBMS configuration. These
parameters are configured in the configuration navigation tree.
The CME allows users to create a single NodeB or create NodeBs in batches:
Creating a single NodeB on the GUI
In the configuration navigation tree, users can create a logical NodeB and perform the
following operations:

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Configure basic data about the logical NodeB, such as basic information, algorithm
parameters, and overload control parameters.

Configure Iub interface data on the RNC side in ATM, IP, or ATM/IP dual-stack mode,
such as physical layer data, interface control plane data, user plane data, and
management plane data.

Create cells under a single logical NodeB in the configuration navigation tree by using
cell templates.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

65

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Using a NodeB template, users can create the corresponding physical NodeB and perform
the following operations:

Configure basic information about the physical NodeB in the configuration navigation
tree, such as IP address of the NodeB local maintenance channel, basic NodeB
attributes, time zone, clock source, and active/standby mode of transmission interface
boards.

Configure device data about the physical NodeB on the device panel, such as data
about cabinets, boards, RF units, monitoring units, power modules, and antenna line
devices (ALDs).

Configure transport data about the physical NodeB, such as the physical link data and
transmission link data about the ATM- or IP-based NodeB

Configure radio data about the physical NodeB in the configuration navigation tree,
such as site data, sector data, uplink/downlink baseband resource group data, cell data,
and cell-related data.

Creating NodeBs in batches


The CME allows users to create NodeBs in batches in either of the following modes:

Importing negotiated Iub interface data


Using NodeB templates, users can import negotiated Iub interface data that contains
physical NodeB data. They can configure Iub interface data about the logical and
physical NodeBs. Using cell templates, users can add cells in batches for the logical
NodeB by import network planning data. Then, NodeBs are created in batches. In this
mode, a maximum of 50 NodeBs can be created at a time.
In the configuration navigation tree, users can reconfigure the basic information and
radio data about the logical NodeB and the physical NodeB. On the device panel, users
can reconfigure the device parameters of the physical NodeB. Using cell templates,
users can import cell parameters in batches to modify cell algorithm parameters in
batches. By importing network planning data in batches, users can reconfigure radio
data about the physical NodeB, such as cell ID, local cell frequency, power, and cell
radius.
The negotiated Iub data template that contains physical NodeB data is an XLS or
XLSM file that records the data required for creating NodeBs. It consists of the Iub
interface data on the RNC side and Iub interface data on the physical NodeB side.

Importing a summary data file


The CME provides a tool for customizing summary data files. Users can define objects
and parameters by using this customization tool. The customization tool allows users
to customize a summary data file and edit the mappings between collected data and NE
configuration objects. Then, the tool automatically generates customized sheets for the
summary data file. This simplifies the procedure for customizing summary data files
and improves data editing efficiency. In this mode, a maximum of 50 NodeBs can be
created at a time.

The CME allows users to create neighbor relationships in the following modes:
In the configuration navigation tree
In the configuration navigation tree, users can add or delete neighboring GSM, UMTS,
and LTE cells in batches for UMTS cells by referencing neighbor relationship templates.
The CME also allows users to configure bidirectional neighbor relationships for GSM and
UMTS cells to ensure that MSs are properly handed over between these cells.
Importing network planning data
By importing network planning data, users can create neighbor relationships in batches. A
network planning template is an XLS, XLSM, or TXT file that contains basic parameters

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

66

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

of UMTS cells, neighboring GSM, UMTS, and LTE cell relationships, and data about
external cells. The CME also allows users to configure bidirectional neighbor
relationships for GSM, UMTS, and LTE cells to ensure that MSs are properly handed over
between these cells.

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R011C00:
Customizing summary data files

Dependency
Excel 2003, Excel 2007, or Excel 2010 must be installed on the PC running the CME client.
Users must purchase and install Microsoft Office in advance.

WOFD-186210 Network Reconfiguration WRAN


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R010.

Summary
Network reconfiguration applies to network expansion and routine maintenance scenarios.
Users need to reconfigure the device, transport, and radio data about RNCs and NodeBs in the
following modes: configuration navigation tree, device panel, batch modification center,
planned data import-export, and interlocked modification.
The CME provides typical functions for network service reconstruction, such as reconfiguring
RNC pools, multioperator core network (MOCN) cells, High Speed Packet Access (HSPA)
cells, and IP pools in batches.

Benefits
This feature brings about the following benefits:
Graphical reconfiguration modes simplify data reconfiguration procedures and ensure
data correctness.
The batch modification center and planned data import-export function significantly
improve data reconfiguration efficiency.
Interlocked modification and bidirectional neighbor relationships ensure data consistency
across the entire network.

Description
The CME provides the following network reconfiguration modes:
Configuration navigation tree: It is also known as a configuration express. It consists of a
tree in the left pane and a table in the right pane. The CME displays all configuration
objects and parameters in the configuration navigation tree for users to add, delete, and
modify them.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

67

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Device panel: The device panel displays the components of physical devices such as
cabinets and boards. Users can view component attributes on the device panel. They can
also add, delete, and modify parameters about the physical devices.
Batch modification center: The CME allows users to change the values of parameters in
batches under a specified object for RNCs of the same version in the planned data area.
Iub batch configuration center: The CME allows users to add and delete Iub transmission
data in batches. Users can easily select required physical layer links and planned
parameters for configuring the transport data about the NodeBs under an RNC in batches.
Configuration wizard: The configuration wizard presents users with a sequence of dialog
boxes that lead users with a series of well-defined steps. In the configuration wizard,
correlated operations such as modifying physical NodeB parameters in batches, changing
frequencies, and deleting cells and NodeBs in batches are easy to perform.
Interface data and planned data import-export: The CME allows users to batch-configure
objects and parameters by importing and exporting a data planning template for onsite
network planning and network optimization data. The CME allows users to import and
export the following planned data in batches: negotiated Iub interface data, negotiated Iub
interface data containing physical NodeB data, network planning data, and cell
parameters.
Interlocked modification: In routine maintenance scenarios such as algorithm parameter
optimization, users need to adjust cell parameters such as LACs, frequencies and
scrambling codes. When users modify cell parameters in the configuration navigation tree,
batch modification center, or planned data import-export mode, the CME automatically
triggers interlocked modification for external cell parameters under GSM, UMTS, and
LTE NEs. This ensures parameter consistency.
Network reconfiguration involves device data, transport data, and radio data. It also supports
the reconstruction of typical network services.
Reconfiguring device data:
Reconfiguring RNC device parameters

Reconfiguring RNC global parameters in Configuration Navigation Tree mode or


Batch Modification Center mode
In the configuration navigation tree, users can reconfigure RNC global parameters
such as the telecom operator information, system information, clock mode, time zone
information, OSP, and TRM mappings.
In the batch modification center, users can batch-reconfigure common RNC global
parameters such as the RNC timer parameters and clock mode.

Reconfiguring RNC device parameters in Device Panel mode


On the device panel, users can reconfigure parameters about RNC devices such as
cabinets, subracks, and boards. These parameters are the basis for carrying upper-layer
data.

Reconfiguring NodeB device parameters

Reconfiguring basic NodeB parameters in Configuration Navigation Tree mode or


Batch Modification Center mode
In the configuration navigation tree, users can reconfigure the basic information about
the logical NodeB and that about the physical NodeB, such as NodeB algorithm
parameters, NodeB OLC parameters, IP address of the NodeB local maintenance
channel, basic attributes of the physical NodeB, time zone, clock source, and
active/standby mode of transmission interface boards.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

68

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

In the batch modification center, users can batch-reconfigure commonly-used basic


parameters about logical NodeBs, such as NodeB algorithm parameters and LDR
parameters.

Reconfiguring device parameters about physical NodeBs in the Device Panel mode
On the device panel, users can reconfigure parameters about NodeB devices such as
cabinets, boards, RF modules, and power modules. These parameters are the basis for
carrying upper-layer data.

Reconfiguring transport data:


Reconfiguring RNC transport parameters in Configuration Navigation Tree mode
In the configuration navigation tree, users can reconfigure RNC transport parameters
such as the Iur, Iu-CS, Iu-PS, Iu-BC, Iu-PC, Gi, and Iur-g interface data. This ensures
proper transmission between NEs. Reconfiguring NodeB transport parameters:

Expanding transmission capacity in Configuration Navigation Tree mode, Iub Batch


Configuration Center mode, or Iub Data Import-Export Containing Physical NodeB
Data mode
In the configuration navigation tree, users can configure the Iub interface data about an
ATM- or IP-based logical NodeB and physical NodeB to ensure proper transmission
between Iub interfaces.
In the Iub batch configuration center, users can batch-configure the following transport
configuration objects for an ATM-based logical NodeB: NBAP, Adjacent Node, AAL2
Route, AAL2PATH, NodeB IP Address, IPoA PVC. They can batch configure the
following transport configuration objects for an IP-based logical NodeB: NBAP,
Adjacent Node, IP Path, and NodeB IP Address.
By importing and exporting negotiated Iub interface data, users can batch-configure
the Iub interface data for ATM- or IP-based logical NodeBs.
By importing and exporting negotiated Iub interface data that contains physical NodeB
data, users can batch-configure the Iub interface data for ATM- or IP-based logical
NodeBs and physical NodeBs.

Reconfiguring NodeB transport parameters in Configuration Navigation Tree mode,


Iub Data Import-Export mode, Iub Data Import-Export Containing Physical NodeB
Data mode, Physical NodeB Batch Configuration Wizard mode, or NodeB Topology
Management mode
In the configuration navigation tree, users can configure the Iub interface data about an
ATM- or IP-based logical NodeB and physical NodeB to ensure proper transmission
between Iub interfaces.
By importing and exporting negotiated Iub interface data, users can batch-configure
the Iub interface data for ATM- or IP-based logical NodeBs.
By importing and exporting negotiated Iub interface data that contains physical NodeB
data, users can batch-configure the Iub interface data for ATM- or IP-based logical
NodeBs and physical NodeBs.
By using the NodeB batch configuration wizard, users can modify the following
primary parameters of physical NodeBs under an RNC in a planned data area:
IMAGRP, IPOA, PPPOE, IPPATH, MPGRP, DEVIP, PPP, AAL2NODE, SNTP, and
SCTP.

Reconfiguring radio data:


Reconfiguring global radio parameters in Configuration Navigation Tree mode or Batch
Modification Center mode

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

69

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

In the configuration navigation tree, users can configure global radio algorithm parameters
of the RNC, such as process control switch, load control, direct retry algorithm parameters,
handover algorithm parameters, channel management parameters, and multimedia
broadcast and multicast service (MBMS) parameters. These parameters can also be
reconfigured in batches in the batch modification center.
Expanding cell capacity and reconfiguring data

Creating or deleting cells in Configuration Navigation Tree mode, Network Planning


Data Import-Export mode, or Batch Cell Deletion Wizard mode
By using cell templates, users can add cells in batches under a logical NodeB by
importing and exporting network planning data. A network planning data template
contains basic parameters of UMTS cells, neighboring GSM, UMTS, and LTE
relationships, and information about external cells.
In the configuration navigation tree, users can add or delete cells from physical
NodeBs.
Users can delete cells in batches under controllers of the same version. When deleting
cells, they can also delete their external cells and neighboring cells under GSM, UMTS,
and LTE NEs inside the planned data area.

Reconfiguring cell parameters in Configuration Navigation Tree mode, Batch


Modification Center mode, Cell Parameter Import-Export mode, Interlocked
Modification mode, Physical NodeB Batch Configuration Wizard mode, or Network
Planning Data Import-Export mode
In the configuration navigation tree, users can reconfigure the basic parameters and
algorithm parameters of cells. These parameters can also be reconfigured in batches by
using the batch modification center or by using the cell parameter import-export
function.
Parameters for cells under physical NodeBs can be modified in batches by using the
physical NodeB batch configuration wizard or network planning data import-export
function.

Reconfiguring frequency parameters in Frequency Modification Wizard mode or


Network Planning Data Import-Export mode
The CME provides a cell frequency reconfiguration wizard that allows users to modify
frequencies and scrambling codes for specified cells under RNCs and external cells.
Parameters that can be modified in batches include cell frequency bands, cell
uplink/downlink frequencies, and cell primary scrambling codes.
When modifying frequencies or scrambling codes for specified cells under RNCs in
batches, the CME modifies the frequencies or scrambling codes for corresponding
local cells under physical NodeBs and those for corresponding external cells in the
planned data area. At the same time, the CME updates neighbor relationships. When
modifying frequencies or scrambling codes for specified external cells in batches, the
CME updates only neighbor relationships.

Reconfiguring neighbor relationships and external cell parameters in Configuration


Navigation Tree mode or Network Planning Data Import-Export mode
In the configuration navigation tree, users can add or delete GSM, UMTS, and LTE
relationships in batches for UMTS cells by referencing neighbor relationship templates.
The CME also allows users to configure bidirectional neighbor relationships for GSM and
UMTS cells to ensure that MSs are properly handed over between these cells.
By importing network planning data, users can create neighbor relationships in batches.
The CME verifies the data before the import and provides a report after the import. A
network planning template is an XLS, XLSM, or TXT file that contains radio data such as
basic parameters about UMTS cells, and local cell frequencies of physical NodeBs, and
power neighboring GSM, UMTS, and LTE relationships, and external cells. The CME
Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

70

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

also allows users to configure bidirectional neighbor relationships for GSM, UMTS, and
LTE cells to ensure that MSs are properly handed over between these cells.
Reconstructing network services:
Configuring RNC pools in batches
In an RNC pool, a NodeB is controlled by two RNCs, a primary RNC and a secondary
RNC. If a fault occurs on the primary RNC, the NodeB is automatically switched over to
the secondary RNC to ensure service continuity. This minimizes the impact on ongoing
services on the live network.
The CME allows users to change homing relationships between single-homing and
dual-homing in batches using a wizard. For example, to change homing relationships from
single-homing to dual-homing, users need to reconfigure the following objects:

Homing relationships of target NodeBs and cells under them: Homing relationships are
changed from single-homing to primary-homing under the primary RNC.

Iub transmission from the NodeBs to the secondary RNC

Cells, external cells, and neighboring cells of the NodeBs under the secondary RNC.
This ensures consistency of cell, external cell, and neighboring cell data with that
under the primary RNC

Neighbor relationships of neighboring RNCs

Users can reconfigure a maximum of 50 single-homing NodeBs as dual-homing NodeBs


in an RNC pool at a time.
Reconfiguring MOCN sharing for cells in batches
The MOCN was introduced in 3GPP Release 6. In an MOCN, both NEs on the access
network (such as RNCs and NodeBs) and TRX resources are shared. The MOCN uses
common TRX resources and allows multiple telecom operators to share one cell. Common
TRXs have a higher resource usage than private TRXs.
The CME allows users to configure MOCN cells in batches. After importing an MOCN
reconfiguration template, users can change non-MOCN cells to MOCN cells or change
MOCN cells to non-MOCN cells in batches by setting the telecom operator group
information for NodeBs.
Reconfiguring HSPA cells in batches
WCDMA introduces High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA) in 3GPP Release 5
and High Speed Uplink Packet Access (HSUPA) in 3GPP Release 6. HSDPA and HSUPA
are amalgamated into HSPA, which ensures efficient scheduling and fast retransmission
and therefore improves HSPA's performance.
The CME allows users to reconfigure HSPA cells in batches by selecting a cell template
and modifying HSPA cell parameters through a wizard.
Reconfiguring IP pools in batches
IP pools allow IP address sharing and load balancing within the pools. IP pools are
configured for Iur, Iub, Iu-PS, and Iu-CS interfaces to balance services between interface
boards within IP pools, and improve reliability and usage of IP-based networks.
The CME allows users to change transmission modes for NodeBs to IP pools in batches
through a wizard.

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R012C00:
Supporting interlocked modification for cell parameters with eNodeBs

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

71

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Reconfiguring IP pools in batches


The following functions are added to M2000 V200R011C00:
Allowing interlocked deletion of corresponding external cells and neighbor relationships
under GSM NEs
Supporting interlocked modification for cell parameters with GSM NEs
Reconfiguring NodeBs as dual-homing NodeBs in an RNC pool

Dependency
Excel 2003, Excel 2007, or Excel 2010 must be installed on the PC running the CME
client. Users must purchase and install Microsoft Office in advance.
Reconfiguring IP pools in batches needs the customized software and dedicated services
of Huawei which are not included in this feature.

WOFD-186300 Network Initial Configuration LTE


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R010.

Summary
Users can configure the global, device, and transport data about the LTE by using the
configuration navigation tree or device panel provided by the CME, or by importing negotiated
data in batches. They can also create eNodeBs and cells by using the GUI or by importing
negotiated data in batches, and create neighbor relationships by using the configuration
navigation tree or by importing network planning data in batches.

Benefits
This feature brings about the following benefits:
Convenient and flexible modes for network initial configuration based on the scenario
Simplified site deployment and improved site deployment efficiency
Bidirectional neighbor relationship configuration for ensuring configuration data
consistency

Description
The CME allows users to create a single eNodeB or create eNodeBs in batches:
Creating a single eNodeB
The CME allows users to create a single eNodeB on the GUI by using an eNodeB
template.
Users can configure the device data, transport data, and radio data about the eNodeB in the
configuration navigation tree.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Configure device data about the eNodeB on the device panel, such as cabinet data,
subrack data, board data, common parameters, clock data, and time zone data.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

72

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Configure transport data about the eNodeB in the configuration navigation tree,
including data about the physical layer, link layer, network layer, transport layer, and
algorithm category.

Configure radio data about the eNodeB in the configuration navigation tree, including
global algorithm parameters, telecom operators' basic parameters, handover
parameters, and cell algorithm parameters.

Creating eNodeBs in batches


The CME allows users to create eNodeBs and cells in batches quickly by using a default or
user-defined summary data file to import data. In this mode, a maximum of 50 eNodeBs
can be created at a time.
A summary data file is an XLS or XLSM file that contains the required data planned for
creating eNodeBs in batches. Together with data in the eNodeB template, data in this file
contributes to eNodeB creation and simplifies the data editing process. Users can also
create eNodeBs by referring to data in the radio template or cell template. The summary
data file contains eNodeB common parameters, eNodeB transport parameters, and
eNodeB radio parameters.
The CME provides a tool for customizing summary data files. Users can define objects
and parameters by using this customization tool. The customization tool allows users to
customize a summary data file and edit the mappings between collected data and NE
configuration objects. Then, the tool automatically generates customized sheets for the
summary data file. This simplifies the procedure for customizing summary data files and
improves data editing efficiency.
The CME allows users to create neighbor relationships in the following modes:
Creating neighbor relationships by using the configuration navigation tree
In the configuration navigation tree, users can add and delete neighboring GSM, UMTS,
LTE, or CDMA relationships to ensure proper UE handover between cells.
Creating neighbor relationships in batches by importing network planning data
By importing network planning data, users can create neighbor relationships in batches. A
network planning template is an XLS, XLSM, or TXT file that contains basic data about
LTE cells, neighboring GSM, UMTS, LTE and CDMA relationships, data about external
cells, and blacklist for neighboring LTE cells. The CME also allows users to configure
bidirectional neighbor relationships for GSM, UMTS, and LTE cells to ensure that MSs
are properly handed over between these cells.

Enhancement
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R012C00:
Importing neighboring UMTS/CDMA relationships and external cell information as
network planning data
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R011C00:
Importing and exporting network planning data
Customizing summary data files

Dependency
Excel 2003, Excel 2007, or Excel 2010 must be installed on the PC running the CME client.
Users must purchase and install Microsoft Office in advance.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

73

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

WOFD-186310 Network Reconfiguration LTE


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R010.

Summary
Network reconfiguration applies to network expansion and routine maintenance scenarios.
Users need to reconfigure the device data, transport data, and radio data about eNodeBs in the
following modes: configuration navigation tree, device panel, batch modification center,
planned data import-export, and interlocked modification.

Benefits
This feature brings about the following benefits:
Graphical reconfiguration modes simplify data reconfiguration procedures and ensure
data correctness.
The batch modification center and planned data import-export function significantly
improve data reconfiguration efficiency.
Interlocked cell parameter modification and bidirectional neighbor relationship
configuration ensure data consistency across the entire network.

Description
The CME provides the following network reconfiguration modes:
Configuration navigation tree: It is also known as a configuration express. It consists of a
tree in the left pane and a table in the right pane. The CME displays all configuration
objects and parameters in the configuration navigation tree for users to add, delete, and
modify them.
Device panel: The device panel displays the components of physical devices such as
cabinets, subracks, and boards. Users can view component attributes on the device panel.
They can also add, delete, and modify parameters about the physical devices.
Batch modification center: The CME allows users to change the values of parameters in
batches under a specified object for eNodeBs of the same version in the planned data area.
Planned data import-export: The CME allows users to batch-configure objects and
parameters by importing and exporting a data planning template for onsite network
planning and network optimization data. Users can import and export network planning
data in batches.
Interlocked modification: In routine maintenance scenarios such as algorithm parameter
optimization, users need to adjust cell parameters such as TACs, PCIs, and frequencies.
When users modify cell parameters in batch modification center, or planned data
import-export mode, the CME automatically triggers interlocked modification for external
cell parameters under GSM, UMTS, and LTE NEs. This ensures parameter consistency.
Network reconfiguration involves device data, transport data, and radio data.
Reconfiguring device data:
Reconfiguring BSC device parameters in Configuration Navigation Tree mode or Device
Panel mode

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

74

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

In the configuration navigation tree or device panel, users can reconfigure parameters
about eNodeB devices such as cabinets, subracks, boards, RF units, and ports. They can
also reconfigure common parameters and clock and time zone parameters. These
parameters are the basis for carrying upper-layer data.
Reconfiguring transport data:
Expanding transmission capacity in Configuration Navigation Tree mode
In the configuration navigation tree, users can expand cell bandwidth and reconfigure
physical transmission bandwidth, MME connections, and S-GW connections, involving
data about the physical layer, link layer, network layer, and transmission layer, to expand
transmission capacity.
Reconfiguring eNodeB transport parameters in Configuration Navigation Tree mode
In the configuration navigation tree, users can reconfigure transport data, including data
about the physical layer, link layer, network layer, transmission layer, and algorithm
category. For example, they can configure eNodeB co-transmission, reconfigure remote
maintenance channel, or change the IP address of the clock server.
Reconfiguring radio data:
Reconfiguring global radio parameters in Configuration Navigation Tree mode or Batch
Modification Center mode
In the configuration navigation tree, users can configure global radio parameters for the
eNodeB, such as cell basic parameters, global algorithm parameters, telecom operators'
basic parameters, handover parameters, external cells, and interface information.
In the batch modification center, users can modify common global radio parameters such
as global algorithm parameters and handover parameters in batches.
Expanding cell capacity and reconfiguring data

Creating cells in Configuration Navigation Tree mode or Network Planning Data


Import-Export mode
By using cell templates, users can create eNodeB cells in the configuration navigation
tree, or create eNodeB cells in batches by importing and exporting network planning
data.
A network planning template is an XLS, XLSM, or TXT file that contains basic data
about LTE cells, neighboring GSM, UMTS, LTE and CDMA relationships, data about
external cells, and blacklist for neighboring LTE cells.

Reconfiguring cell parameters in Configuration Navigation Tree mode, Batch


Modification mode, Network Planning Data Import-Export mode, and Interlocked
Modification mode
In the configuration navigation tree, users can reconfigure the following cell
parameters: system message parameters, channel configuration parameters, cell
algorithm parameters, and neighboring GSM, UMTS, LTE, and CDMA relationships.
In the batch modification center, users can modify the following common cell
parameters in batches: system message parameters, channel configuration parameters,
and cell algorithm parameters.
By using the network planning data import-export function, users can modify basic
parameters such as cell basic information and cell operator information in batches.
They can also add LTE cells to the blacklist in batches.

Reconfiguring neighbor relationships and external cell parameters in Configuration


Navigation Tree mode or Network Planning Data Import-Export mode
In the configuration navigation tree, users can add and delete neighboring GSM, UMTS,
LTE, or CDMA relationships to ensure proper UE handover between cells.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

75

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

By importing network planning data, users can create neighbor relationships in batches.
The CME verifies the data before the import and provides a report after the import. A
network planning template is an XLS, XLSM, or TXT file that contains basic data about
LTE cells, neighboring GSM, UMTS, LTE and CDMA relationships, data about external
cells, and blacklist for neighboring LTE cells. The CME also allows users to configure
bidirectional neighbor relationships for GSM, UMTS, and LTE cells to ensure that MSs
are properly handed over between these cells.

Enhancement
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R012C00:
Supporting interlocked modification for cell parameters
Importing neighboring UMTS/CDMA relationships and external cell information as
network planning data
The following function is added to M2000 V200R011C00:
Importing and exporting network planning data

Dependency
Excel 2003, Excel 2007, or Excel 2010 must be installed on the PC running the CME client.
Users must purchase and install Microsoft Office in advance.

WOFD-186400 Network Initial Configuration SingleRAN


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R010.

Summary
The multimode base station (MBTS) is a future-oriented base station solution provided by
Huawei, which integrates the base station devices of different RATs. MBTSs are base stations
that support two or more RATs among GSM, UMTS, and LTE. For example, MBTS(GU)s
support GSM and UMTS and MBTS(GUL)s support GSM, UMTS, and LTE.
Network initial configuration is performed at the deployment phase for SingleRAN networks.
Initial configuration ensures that devices run properly and provide required service capability.
After a multimode base station controller (MBSC) is connected to the M2000, users can use the
CME to complete the initial configuration of controller global data, device data, and transport
data. They can also create MBTSs and cells in capacity expansion or integrated mode, and
create neighbor relationships.

Benefits
This feature brings about the following benefits:
Allowing users to create MBTSs flexibly, simplifying initial configuration in various
scenarios
Simplifying site deployment by providing a clear procedure, and improving site
deployment efficiency by supporting batch operations

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

76

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Providing a multimode device panel, integrating configuration access for devices of


different RATs, simplifying user operations

Description
Using the CME to complete the initial configuration of an MBSC(GU):
To complete the initial configuration for the global data, transport data, and radio data of
the MBSC(GU), users can configure the BSC and RNC by referring to the features
WOFD-186100 Network Initial Configuration GBSS and WOFD-186200 Network
Initial Configuration WRAN, respectively.
The CME displays the device parameters of the MBSC(GU) on the MBSC device panel,
which displays the components of physical devices for the MBSC. Users can view the
attributes of the components. They can also add, delete, and modify parameters of physical
devices on the live network, such as cabinets, subracks, boards, and physical ports.
Using the CME to create MBTSs:
Creating a single MBTS

Creating an MBTS by binding base stations of different RATs


The CME allows users to configure single-mode base stations of different RATs as an
MBTS. It also allows users to export MBTS binding relationships as an XLS file.

Creating an MBTS by expanding the capacity of a single-mode base station


The CME also allows users to create an MBTS by expanding the capacity of a
single-mode base station. When base stations of one or two RATs already exist, users
can create base stations of other RATs and bind the base stations as an MBTS.

Creating an MBTS in integrated mode


In wizard mode, users can create single-mode base stations that form the MBTS by
using the MBTS template and bind the base stations as an MBTS. Currently, only
MBTS(GU)s and MBTS(GL)s can be created in integrated mode.

Creating MBTSs in batches

Binding single-mode base stations as MBTSs in batches


The CME allows users to import a binding relationship table to bind base stations of
different RATs as required MBTSs in batches. It also allows users to export MBTS
binding relationships as an XLS file.

Importing negotiated interface data


The CME provides a wizard, allowing users to create MBTSs in batches by using
negotiated interface data templates of different RATs and MBTS binding relationship
tables. The CME also allows users to create multiple single-mode base stations and
bind them as MBTSs or create MBTSs by expanding the capacities of single-mode
base stations. Currently, only MBTS(GU)s, MBTS(GL)s, and MBTS(GUL)s can be
created by importing negotiated interface data.

Using the CME to create neighbor relationships:


To create neighbor relationships for SingleRAN networks, users can create neighbor
relationships for single-mode cells by referring to the features WOFD-186100 Network Initial
Configuration GBSS, WOFD-186200 Network Initial Configuration WRAN, and
WOFD-186300 Network Initial Configuration LTE, respectively.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

77

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R011C01:
Binding NodeBs and eNodeBs as MBTS(UL)s in batches
The following function is added to M2000 V200R011C00:
Creating MBTS(GUL)s through capacity expansion

Dependency
Excel 2003, Excel 2007, or Excel 2010 must be installed on the PC running the CME client.
Users must purchase and install Microsoft Office in advance.

WOFD-186410 Network Reconfiguration SingleRAN


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R010.

Summary
Network reconfiguration applies to network expansion and routine maintenance scenarios.
Users need to reconfigure the device data, transport data, and radio data about controllers and
base stations by performing data reconfiguration for each RAT. Device data can also be
reconfigured centrally on the multimode device panel.

Benefits
This feature brings about the following benefits:
The CME centrally displays data about devices in different RATs on the multimode device
panel and allows users to configure data on the device panel, simplifying operations.
The CME displays multiple views on the MBTS device panel, allowing users to view and
configure device data about single- and multi-mode base stations.

Description
MBTSs are base stations that support two or more RATs among GSM, UMTS, and LTE. For
example, MBTS(GU)s and MBTS(GUL)s. Network reconfiguration involves the
reconfiguration of device, transport, and radio data.
Reconfiguring device data:
Reconfiguring the global data and basic information about MBSCs
Users can reconfigure the global data about the BSC and the RNC by referring to the
features WOFD-186110 Network Reconfiguration GBSS and WOFD-186210 Network
Reconfiguration WRAN, respectively.
Users can reconfigure the basic information about the single-mode base stations by
referring to the features WOFD-186110 Network Reconfiguration GBSS,
WOFD-186210 Network Reconfiguration WRAN, and WOFD-186310 Network
Reconfiguration LTE, respectively.
Reconfiguring MBSC device parameters in Device Panel mode

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

78

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

The device panel displays the components of the physical devices for the MBSC, such as
cabinets, subracks, boards, and physical ports, in a graphical manner. Users can view the
attributes on the GUI. They can also add, delete, and modify parameters about the physical
devices.
Reconfiguring MBTS device parameters in Device Panel mode
On the MBTS device panel, the configuration parameters of single- or multi-mode base
stations are displayed. For common boards like the PMU, EMU, TCU, and FMU, users
can configure the same device parameters for each single-mode base station or configure
the device parameters for the entire MBTS for the parameters to take effect on each
single-mode base station.
Reconfiguring transport data:
Users can reconfigure the transport data about the single-mode base stations by referring to the
features WOFD-186110 Network Reconfiguration GBSS, WOFD-186210 Network
Reconfiguration WRAN, and WOFD-186310 Network Reconfiguration LTE, respectively.
Reconfiguring radio data:
Users can reconfigure the radio data about the single-mode base stations by referring to the
features WOFD-186110 Network Reconfiguration GBSS, WOFD-186210 Network
Reconfiguration WRAN, and WOFD-186310 Network Reconfiguration LTE, respectively.

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R011C00:
MBTS (GUL) configuration management

Dependency
Excel 2003, Excel 2007, or Excel 2010 must be installed on the PC running the CME client.
Users must purchase and install Microsoft Office in advance.

WOFD-186220 Parameter Consistency Check WRAN


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R010.

Summary
The CME allows users to perform integrity, redundancy checks and RNC pool consistency
checks on the configuration data of a single RNC. It also allows users to restore data and
compare check results.

Benefits
This feature helps users detect and correct incomplete and redundant configuration data for a
single RNC. This improves configuration data accuracy and reduces the amount of useless data.
The RNC pool consistency check function ensures data consistency in the RNC pool.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

79

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Description
The CME provides a project for users to check the integrity and redundancy of the RNC
configuration data, and to check the consistency of an RNC pool that has been configured or
activated. The M2000 centrally manages scheduled tasks for data integrity and redundancy
checks by using the feature WOFD-071200 Centralized Task Manager.
Checking redundancy
Redundant data is bottom-layer data that is not referenced by upper layers. For example,
data related to redundant device IP addresses, local cells, ATM-based transmission,
IP-based transmission, and location areas. Redundancy checks help clear redundant data
and reduce system load.
Checking integrity
Integrity checks are used to detect whether mandatory configuration objects for
implementing NE services are configured completely. Integrity checks involve checking
the physical bearer links of ATM-based transmission links, IP link validity, cells, and
neighbor relationships.
Checking data consistency in an RNC pool
Users can set check criteria to check the configuration consistency on the primary and
secondary RNCs, such as to check whether transport and radio parameters exist on the
primary and secondary RNCs and whether the transport and radio parameters are
consistent on the primary and secondary RNCs.
After the consistency check is complete, the CME generates check results with alarm severities
of error, major, and warning. Users can customize the alarm severity of each check result. The
CME allows users to save check results as an HTML, CSV, XLS, PDF, or TXT file and to
compare check results.
It also provides the following modes for restoring incorrect data based on check results:

Wizard-based data update: The CME provides modification suggestions for users.

GUI-based data editing: The CME provides a general configuration window for users
to modify related configuration data.

Automatic restoration: The CME automatically changes the parameter values to the
recommended values.

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R011C00:
Checking data consistency in an RNC pool

Dependency
None

WOFD-186120 Parameter Consistency Check GBSS


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R010.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

80

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Summary
The CME allows users to perform integrity and redundancy checks on the configuration data of
a single GBSC. It also allows users to restore data and compare check results.

Benefits
This feature helps users detect and correct incomplete and redundant configuration data for a
single GBSC. This improves configuration data accuracy and reduces the amount of useless
data.

Description
The CME provides a project for users to check the integrity and redundancy of the GBSC
configuration data that has been configured or activated. The M2000 uses the feature
WOFD-071200 Centralized Task Manager to centrally manage scheduled tasks for data
integrity and redundancy checks.
Redundancy check
Redundant data is bottom-layer data that is not referenced by upper layers. For example,
data related to redundant device IP addresses, IP-based transmission, and GBSC interfaces.
Redundancy checks help clear redundant data and reduce system load.
Integrity check
Integrity checks are used to detect whether mandatory configuration objects for
implementing NE services are configured completely. Integrity checks involve checking
GBTS data, IP link validity, internal cells, and neighbor relationships.
After the consistency check is complete, the CME generates check results with alarm severities
of error, major, and warning. Users can customize the alarm severity of each check result. The
CME allows users to save check results as an HTML, CSV, XLS, PDF, or TXT file and to
compare check results.
It also provides the following modes for restoring incorrect data based on check results:

GUI-based data editing: The CME provides a general configuration window for users
to modify related configuration data.

Wizard-based data update: The CME provides modification suggestions for users.

Automatic restoration: The CME automatically changes the parameter values to the
recommended values.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
None

WOFD-186420 Parameter Consistency Check SingleRAN


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R010.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

81

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Summary
The configuration of MBTS common resources and RRU resources must be kept consistent
between different modes. The CME performs consistency check on common devices of the
MBTS, conflict check on RRU resources, and consistency check on dynamic spectrum sharing
for MBTS(GU)s.

Benefits
This feature ensures consistent and valid parameter configuration for MBTS common resources,
RRU resources, and dynamic spectrum sharing among various RATs. Therefore, impacts on
services due to incorrect or inconsistent configurations are eliminated.

Description
This feature provides the following functions:
Common device consistency check
In BM/TC separated mode, MBTS common boards such as the PMU, EMU, TCU, and
FMU may be configured in GSM, UMTS, or LTE modes. Therefore, the same
configuration parameters must be set to the same value in each mode. Otherwise,
configuration errors will occur and alarms indicating inconsistent parameters will be
generated.
By using the data consistency check function, the CME identifies MBTS common boards
and checks for inconsistent parameters of the common boards.
The CME allows users to set the primary and secondary RATs of MBTSs. If any parameter
inconsistency is detected, the CME updates the base station configuration parameters of
the secondary RAT based on the parameters of the primary RAT. This ensures data
consistency.
RRU resource conflict check
Based on the data of one RAT for an MBTS, users can check whether the RF resources of
other RATs conflict with the baseline data. The check items include number of carriers,
carrier bandwidths, carrier intervals, and carrier power. Currently, MBTS(UL)s do not
support this function.
Consistency check of MBTS(GU) dynamic spectrum sharing
The dynamic spectrum sharing (DSS) function dynamically allocates some GSM
spectrum resources between the GSM and UMTS networks. This function utilizes
different busy hours for voice services on the GSM network and for data services on the
UMTS network. This function improves spectrum efficiency and reduces the overall cost
of data services for telecom operators.
The CME allows users to check the consistency of dynamic spectrum sharing for
MBTS(GU)s. The CME provides a sharing switch and allows users to check for frequency
band conflicts for base stations where dynamic spectrum sharing tasks have been created.
After the consistency check is complete, the CME generates check results with alarm severities
of error, major, and warning. Users can customize the alarm severity of each check result. The
CME allows users to save check results as an HTML, CSV, XLS, PDF, or TXT file and to
compare check results.
It also provides the following modes for restoring incorrect data based on check results:

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Wizard-based data update: The CME provides modification suggestions for users.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

82

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

GUI-based data editing: The CME provides a general configuration window for users
to modify related configuration data.

Automatic restoration: The CME automatically changes the parameter values to the
recommended values.

Enhancement
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R011C00:
Consistency check of MBTS(GUL) common resources
Consistency check of MBTS(GU) dynamic spectrum sharing

Dependency
None

2.5 Performance Management


WOFD-030100 Performance Measurement Data Collection and Storage
Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Summary
Based on the measurement settings, the M2000 can obtain the measurement results of
performance counters from NEs and save the results in the M2000 database. Users can adjust
the measurement settings and use a template for the measurement settings. They can also view
the measurement status, perform measurement data synchronization, and view the
synchronization status.

Benefits
The user-friendly GUI simplifies operations and facilitates the monitoring and viewing of
the measurement status of an object.
By default, the M2000 collects and stores the measurement results of common object
counters. This can meet the data requirements in multiple O&M scenarios without any
user setting.

Description
This feature provides the following functions:
Setting measurements
The M2000 collects the data of network measurement counters and stores the data in the
M2000 database. Measurement objects, counters, and periods are three required elements
for performance data collection.
A measurement object can be a physical board, a physical subrack, or a logical cell.
Certain corresponding relationships exist between measurement objects and measurement

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

83

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

counters. Each type of measurement object corresponds to some measurement counters.


Measurement objects can be classified as follows:
Objects of the first category: The M2000 automatically displays these measurement
objects, and collects and saves the measurement data of all the objects of this category. No
user setting is required.
Objects of the second category: The M2000 automatically displays these measurement
objects. The M2000 collects the measurement data of these objects only after users
manually type these objects and measure them.
Objects of the third category: The M2000 does not display these measurement objects. It
displays the measurement data of these objects only after users type the data such as the
local network number of the calling party, destination and office direction, local network
number, and supplementary services.
Measurement counters are classified into common counters and extended counters.
When the network is running, the M2000 collects and stores the common counters of the
first category by default. Users can set measurement objects based on the default settings,
or cancel the measuring of common counters.
The M2000 collects and stores extended counters based on the preset measurement objects
and counters.
The M2000 suspends and activates the data collection tasks of some measurement data
based on measurement units. It does not store counter results in suspended measurement
units in the database.
A measurement period refers to the interval for NEs to report performance measurement
results. The report periods for measurement results vary according to measurement
counters of different NEs.
There are five measurement periods that are 5, 15, 30, 60, and 1440 minutes. Measurement
period varies according to NE measurement counters. By default, common counters and
extended counters are collected at the interval of 30 or 60 minutes. Users can also reset the
period to the other periods that the NE measurement counters support. The M2000 allows
users to export the measurement setting information about an NE, such as measurement
periods, objects, sets, units, and counters to XML files. The exported file can be used as a
template for measurement setting. Users can complete the measurement setting by
importing the template file. They can also modify and edit the template file.
Storing measurement data
The database stores collected performance data in the database for a maximum of 30 days.
Users can change the period.
If the M2000 performance counters are not measured based on the default settings or the
network size exceeds the management capacity of the server, the M2000 may not be able
to store the performance counters for 30 days. When the storage duration is about to expire
or the disk space usage has been exceeded, the M2000 automatically dumps performance
data to files.
Performance data dumping affects the performance of the M2000 and therefore it is
disabled by default.
Viewing measurement status
The M2000 provides a dedicate window for viewing the current measurement settings,
including measurement objects and sets, and periods and status of measurement units.
Users can export measurement status information to a TXT, HTML, CSV, or XLS file
based on NEs.
Synchronizing measurement data
To ensure the consistency of performance measurement data between NEs and the M2000,
the M2000 provides manual and automatic measurement data synchronization modes.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

84

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Manual synchronization is performed when users detect exceptions on performance data.


When an NE is disconnected from the M2000 or when the M2000 performance service is
stopped, the M2000 detects that NE performance data is missing. In this case, the M2000
starts automatic supplementary collection. If no results are reported after the automatic
supplementary collection is complete, the M2000 generates an alarm, indicating that the
performance measurement results are missing.
The M2000 also allows users to manage the status of performance data synchronization
tasks. The M2000 provides a window for users to view all the ongoing performance data
synchronization tasks. On the interface, users can also perform operations such as filtering,
sorting, canceling, and retrying synchronization tasks, and resetting their priorities.

Enhancement
Performance data synchronization task management is added to M2000 V200R008.

Dependency
None

WOFD-030500 Performance Measurement Data Query


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Summary
Users can query the performance data imported into the database on the M2000. The M2000
displays the query results in a table, line chart, or column chart. The M2000 also allows users to
print and save the query results, query data by template, query missing data, and subscribe to
performance data.

Benefits
This feature brings about the following benefits:
The M2000 allows users to set search criteria to easily query data based on fixed
conditions and customize search criteria. Multiple data display modes facilitate the
viewing of performance data.
The M2000 allows users to analyze causes of performance result loss in most application
scenarios. This improves efficiency in locating and solving performance result loss
problems.

Description
This feature provides the following functions:
Querying data
The M2000 supports data query by condition and displays the query results in a table, line
chart, or column chart. The supported search criteria are measurement objects,
measurement counters, measurement period, sort mode, and time ranges.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

85

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

The line chart displays the information about multiple counters of an object, or displays
the information about multiple objects of a counter. Line charts and column charts can be
saved as JPG images.
Users can print the query results, and all the data in the active window is printed. They can
also save query results as TXT, HTML, XLS, XLSX, or CSV files.
Query templates
The M2000 allows users to use templates for query. The templates consist of the default
templates and user-defined templates.
A default template is a predefined template provided for some NEs to facilitate the query
of common performance counter data. All the M2000 users can use the default template.
Users can create templates by copying default templates.
Users can save preferred performance data search criteria as a user-defined template.
Templates are saved according to users.
The M2000 allows users to import, export, cut, paste, copy, delete, rename, and view
user-defined templates, delete the templates in batches, and collect template usage
statistics.
When users use a template to query performance data without any modifications of the
conditions, the M2000 does it according to the default conditions of the template. Users
can also reconfigure the search criteria based on the template.
Analyzing causes of performance result loss
The M2000 analyzes causes of performance result loss and provides diagnosis reports.
Based on performance data processing procedures and common problems, the M2000
designs the following diagnosis process: performance result loss check, cause analysis,
and report summarization.
The possible causes for performance result loss are as follows:

An exception occurs when performance results are reported.

Measurement parameters are not set.

NEs are disconnected.

An exception occurs when measurement parameters are delivered.

Performance files are incomplete.

NEs delay reporting performance results.

System resources are unavailable.

A diagnosis report provides causes of performance result loss, and suggestions and
procedures for handling the problems. Users can set criteria for analyzing performance
result loss, which are the same as the result search criteria. Users can also analyze causes
of performance result loss for specified performance query results.
Subscribing to performance data
Users can subscribe to performance data by condition. The supported conditions include
NE objects, measurement periods, and measurement units.
The M2000 displays the newly generated performance data that meets the subscription
conditions in the window. Only one subscription task can be started on one client.

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R012C00:
Analyzing causes of performance result loss

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

86

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Users can collect statistics about performance query template usage and delete the
templates in batches.

WOFD-031000 Customizable Counter Management


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Description
This feature allows users to define new performance counters based on the raw counters
provided by default and based on the existing user-defined counters. This meets the
requirements of performance counters that exceed the range of raw counters in the network
operation and maintenance. The supported calculation rules are +, , x, /, (,) and {and}, where
{and} is used to define constants. Users can create, modify, or delete user-defined counters.
Users can create, modify, and delete user-defined counters, which include the counter name,
unit, measurement set, function unit, formula, and description information. In addition, users
can export and import user-defined counters as XML files.

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R010:
The M2000 allows users to create, modify, and delete the description of user-defined
counters.

WOFD-031050 Default KPI System


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R009.

Description
Based on the customized key performance indicator (KPI) management and the KPI system of
NEs, the M2000 provides a default KPI definition for the NEs and a KPI query profile to
facilitate the information query.
The query interval defined in the default KPI query profile is 5 minutes or 15 minutes. Users
can create a query profile based on the default profile.
This feature applies to the following NEs: SoftX30000, MSC Server, SGSN, GGSN, HLR,
CSCF, HSS, ATS, MGCF, AGCF, MRFP, USN, and UGW.

WOFD-031200 Performance Threshold Alarm


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

87

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Description
This feature allows users to set performance alarm thresholds for measurement counters. When
a counter value exceeds the threshold, a performance alarm is generated. When the counter
value is within the normal range, the alarm is automatically cleared.
This feature consists of threshold definition and threshold management.
Threshold definition:
The M2000 allows users to set multiple alarm thresholds for a counter. The alarm
thresholds can be set according to objects, time segments, periods, and trends. Different
thresholds can be set for the same counter according to objects, time segments, periods,
and trends.
Users can set threshold alarms for user-defined counters.
Combined thresholds are supported. The triggering conditions for generating and clearing
threshold alarms are condition expressions. An expression can contain multiple counters.
The supported calculation rules are +, , x, /, AND, OR, =, !=, >=, >, <, (and), {and},
where {and} is used to define constants.
Thresholds can be set for cell groups. The M2000 summarizes the counter results of all the
cells in a cell group, determines the threshold conditions, and generates performance
threshold alarms for the results that meet the conditions for triggering threshold alarms.
Users can customize the threshold alarm names. After a threshold task is bound with a
user-defined alarm name, the alarms that meet the threshold conditions are reported with
the user-defined alarm names.
The M2000 supports the dynamic change of alarm severities. If alarms of the same
severity are generated consecutively, the severity of this alarm can be changed to a higher
severity. Users can set the times for generating an alarm of the same severity for raising the
alarm severity.
The M2000 generates an alarm only when the times for triggering alarms that meet the
conditions reach a certain threshold. Users can set the threshold.
After an alarm is generated, it is cleared only when the performance counter monitoring
results do not meet the condition that the times of alarm conditions reach a certain
threshold. Users can set the threshold.
Threshold management
The threshold query is supported. Users can filter thresholds according to threshold names,
NEs (or objects under NEs), periods, triggering time segments, and threshold directions.
They can also query thresholds by combining multiple conditions.
The batch activation, suspension, copy, and paste of thresholds are allowed.
NE thresholds can be suspended automatically or manually according to time.

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R011C00:
Cell group thresholds can be set for BSC6900 GSM, BSC6000 (GSM-R), BSC6900
UMTS, and BSC6900 GU.
The following function is added to M2000 V200R009:
The threshold alarm names can be customized.
The following functions are added to M200V200R008:

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

88

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Threshold definition: setting thresholds of cell groups, which is supported only by


BSC6800.
Threshold management

Threshold query

Threshold operation in batches

Suspension of NE thresholds

Dependency
None

WOFD-031600 Remote Service Validation


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R008.

Summary
After the devices on the live network are upgraded, users need to verify that the services can run
normally after the upgrade. The remote service upgrade validation feature allows users to verify
services remotely from the network management center. Therefore, users do not need to verify
the services through site dialing tests. This reduces network maintenance cost and improves
efficiency. In addition, the remote service upgrade validation can be performed on all types of
NEs.

Benefits
This feature allows users to perform the verification remotely after an NE upgrade to avoid or
reduce manual dialing tests on site, reducing upgrade costs and workload.

Description
In the traditional O&M mode, after radio devices are upgraded on the communication network,
local manual dialing tests are required to check whether the services are normal. In this case, the
efficiency is low. Currently, NE upgrades are performed at the network management center
instead of on site to reduce upgrade costs and to improve O&M efficiency.
In this case, the remote service upgrade validation feature is developed. Users can use this
feature to check whether the services of NEs are normal after an upgrade by comparing the key
traffic counters before and after the upgrade. This feature is service-oriented, comprehensive,
precise and measurable, time-based, and object-based. Therefore, it can be used to verify NE
upgrades.
The M2000 verifies the upgrade after an NE upgrade is complete. When verifying the upgrade,
the M2000 obtains raw counters from the NE, calculates KPIs based on the raw counters, and
compares the best KPIs with the standard and historical reference values. Then, the M2000
provides the verification results. Users can save the verification results as an HTML, CSV,
XLS XLSX PDF, or TXT file.

Service upgrade verification is performed on a task basis. The M2000 manages and schedules
the tasks by using the feature WOFD-071200 Centralized Task Manager.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

89

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Enhancement
This feature applies to eNodeBs since M2000 V200R010.

Dependency
This feature applies to GBSS8.1 and RAN11.0 and later versions.

2.6 Security Management


WOFD-040100 Centralized User Authorization and Authentication
Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Summary
The M2000 centrally manages and authenticates O&M users on a network. The M2000
provides functions such as user account management, authority assignment, and user
authentication.

Description
Managing O&M users is the most important aspect of the security management function in the
OSS environment. The M2000 centralized user management and authentication provide
support to harden the access security of the system. The M2000 allows administrators to create,
delete, and change O&M user accounts of both the M2000 and NEs, and assign rights to the
O&M users. The M2000 supports a maximum of 500 M2000 users, including the default
superuser.
The M2000 supports role-based user group management. A user group consists of a set of users
who have the same operation permissions. Operation permissions vary according to user groups.
Basic and rights information is required for creating user accounts and groups. Basic
information includes user or user group names and types. Rights information includes
management domains, operation rights, rights rules, and bound NEs.
The M2000 assigns user rights to users in either of the following modes:
The M2000 directly assigns rights to users by copying existing user rights information.
This simplifies the process of assigning rights.
The M2000 assigns rights to user groups and then to users based on the binding
relationships between user groups and users. The M2000 can assign rights to a user group
by copying rights information about an existing user group. This improves working
efficiency. A user can belong to multiple user groups and has the rights of all the user
groups it belongs to.
The M2000 provides five default user groups: Administrators, Operators, Guests, Maintenance,
and SMManagers. Telecom operators can create other user groups and assign rights to the user
groups as required. The Administrators user group has all rights except security management
rights. The SMManagers user group has only security management rights. Users in this group
can query security logs and perform security management operations, for example, creating
new users and user groups, granting permissions to users and user groups, and changing the
Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

90

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

permissions of users and user groups. Users in other groups do not have security management
rights. The rights of Administrators and SMManagers groups cannot be changed.
The M2000 provides a default superuser, user admin. The default superuser can perform all
operations on the M2000. User Admin belongs to both the Administrators and SMManagers
user groups, and its user group properties cannot be modified.
All the O&M users are authenticated by the M2000. When a user logs in to the M2000 through
an M2000 client or logs in to an NE through the LMT, the M2000 authenticates the login based
on the user name and password. Only the authorized user can log in to and operate the system.
In addition to that, the M2000 authenticates operations performed on an M2000 client or the
LMT. Therefore, users can perform operations with the most restrictive authority.

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R011C00:
The maximum number of M2000 users is increased from 255 to 500.

Dependency
None

WOFD-040300 Security Policy


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Description
This feature allows users to set security policies for the M2000 system based on the
requirements of different security levels. For example, users can set global user password and
account policies, single user password and account policies, access control lists (ACLs),
database password policies, and security-related alarms.
To ensure service data security, the M2000 encrypts stored passwords and tracing data (except
the data collected by using the Trace Server) and data transmitted using USB flash drives. By
default, tracing data is not encrypted because the complicated encryption algorithm affects the
M2000's operating efficiency.
USB flash drives are required for transmitting data to NEs in many application scenarios. The
M2000 provides a tool to prevent key data from being stolen or tampered with. The tool
encrypts data, allows encrypted data transfer using USB flash drives, and protects data integrity.
NEs verify the data integrity and decrypt the data. The tool supports the DES3_CBC,
AES192_CBC, and AES256_CBC encryption algorithms and HMAC_SHA1 and
HMAC_SHA256 integrity algorithms.
The global password policies apply to the passwords of all M2000 users. The policies are as
follows:
Min. length of common user password: The default value is 8.
Min. length of superuser password: The default value is 8.
Max. length of password: The default value is 16.
Duration for which a password cannot be reused (months): The default value is 0.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

91

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Max. valid duration for password (days): The default value is 180.
Min. valid duration for password (days): The default value is 10.
Number of days in advance a warning is given before a password expires: The default
value is 10.
Min. character difference between new password and old password: The default value is 3.
Min. number of letters in a password: The default value is 1.
Min. number of uppercase letters in a password: The default value is 0.
Min. number of lowercase letters in a password: The default value is 0.
Min. number of numerals in a password: The default value is 1.
Minimum number of special characters in a password: Special characters include ~ ! @ #
$ % ^ & * ( ) + - = { } | \\ : \ " ; ' ? , . / ` and space. The default value is 1.
Password cannot contain any space: This policy is disabled by default.
Max. number of same consecutive characters between user name and password: This
policy is disabled by default.
Password cannot contain any word given in password dictionary or any hacker language
(For example, one or several letters in a word cannot be replaced by a numeral or
numerals.) This policy is disabled by default.
Password cannot be the full user name or the reverse of user name: This policy is disabled
by default.
Password cannot contain any repeated string: Users can set both the number of characters
contained in a string and the number of times a string repeats in a password. This policy is
disabled by default.
Password cannot be numerals or letters in ascending, descending, or interval order: For
example, passwords a1z9123, a1z9cba, a1a2b3, and c1b111a are invalid. This policy is
disabled by default.
Similarity between the new password and history passwords: The number of characters
that cannot be repeated between the new and history passwords can be set. The value
ranges from 1 to 24, where 24 is the default value.
The M2000 allows users to set password policies for a single user, and the settings take effect
on only this user:
Max. valid duration for password (days): The default value is 180.
Password must be changed at next login: This policy is disabled by default.
Password cannot be changed: This policy is disabled by default.
The M2000 provides the following password policies for database users:
Oracle database: An Oracle database user password must contain at least eight characters,
including at least one letter and one number.
Sybase database: A Sybase user password must contain at least eight characters, including
at least one upper-case letter, one lower-case letter, and one number.
The M2000 allows users to set global user account policies, and the settings take effect on all
M2000 users:
Min. length of a user name: The default value is 6.
Lockout Duration: Specifies the number of minutes an account remains locked when the
number of failed login attempts exceeds the specified threshold. The default value is 30.
Users can also lock a user account permanently.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

92

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Delay in case of login failure or unlocking failure (seconds): refers to the wait time in case
of re-login and re-unlocking. The default value is 3.
Max. number of user login attempts: When the number of user login attempts reaches the
maximum, the user is automatically locked. The default value is 3.
Superuser not locked permanently: This policy is disabled by default.
Copyright notice displayed after a legal user logs in.
Inactive user policy: If a user does not log in for a specified period, the user account is
hibernated or deleted. By default, the user account is hibernated if a user does not log in for
60 days.
Automatic client locking: After automatic client locking is enabled, the M2000 client is
locked if no operation is performed on it within the specified time. The default setting is 3
minutes.
The M2000 allows users to set user account policies for a single user, and the settings take
effect on only this user:
Automatic idle user logout: After automatic idle user logout feature is enabled, the user
who does not perform any operation on the M2000 client within a specified time range is
automatically logged out. This policy is disabled by default.
Max. number of online users with the same user name: If the number of online users with
the same user name exceeds the preset number, the M2000 does not allow this user to log
in any longer. This policy is disabled by default.
Inactive user policy: If a user does not log in for a specified period, the user account is
hibernated or deleted. This policy is disabled by default.
Login time restriction: A user can log in to the M2000 only within a specified time range.
This policy is disabled by default.
ACL:
The M2000 provides ACLs for users. After an ACL is set, users can log in to the M2000
only by using a specified IP address or network segment. The default superuser is
authorized to set ACLs for all M2000 users. Users in the security management user group
are authorized to set ACLs for all M2000 users except the superuser.
Security alarms:
The M2000 and NEs generate security-related alarms. These alarms are centrally monitored by
the M2000 fault management system. NEs of different types support different alarms.
As defined in the 3GPP specifications, the M2000 and NEs support the following
security-related alarms:
Integrity violation
Operational violation
Physical violation
Security violation
Time domain violation
Security-related alarms vary according to the NE type.

Enhancement
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R011C01:

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

93

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Encrypted storage of passwords and tracing data (except data collected by using the Trace
Server)
Support of password policies for database users
The following password and security policies are added to M2000 V200R010:
Encryption of data transmitted using USB flash drives
More security-related alarm types
Encrypted password storage
More powerful password security policy

A new password must be different from history passwords.

A password cannot contain repeated strings.

A password cannot contain any hacker language. For example, one or several letters in
a word cannot be replaced by a digit or digits.

The following password and security policies are added to M2000 V200R009:
Max. number of the adjacent characters that can be the same in the user name and
password.
The numerals and letters in a password cannot be in the interval sequence of numerals or
letters.
The minimum number of characters different in the new password from the old password.
The password cannot be in reverse order of the characters in a user name.
Automatic unlocking time specified for a user account.
Delay period after a login or unlocking failure.
Superuser not allowed to be locked.
Maximum number of online sessions of one user.
ACL.
The following security policies are added to M2000 V200R008:
The system automatically logs out idle users.
The following security policies are added to M2000 V200R006:
Advance reminder of password expiry (days)
Password cannot contain consecutive and repeated characters.
Password cannot be numerals or letters in ascending or descending order.
Password cannot contain whole or part of user name.
Password cannot contain a word in the password dictionary.

WOFD-040700 Online NE User Monitoring


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R003.

Description
The online NE user monitoring feature allows users to monitor the session status and operations
performed by all NE users. On the session status browse window, information about session

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

94

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

status, such as NE name, user name, user type, and login IP address. On the user operation
monitoring window, information about user operations, such as NE name, user name, user type,
login IP address, user operations, operation time, and execution results is displayed. All the
information about session status and user operations is monitored and displayed on the
monitoring interface in real time.
This feature also allows operators to kick out specified users.

WOFD-040800 Authority-Based and Domain-Based Management in Large


Regional Networks
Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R005.

Description
The large local network is a network in which an MSC server controls several small local
networks, with the bearer part separated from the control part. The radio network devices of
each small local network are connected to the media gateway (MGW) of the network. The
MGW implements the interconnection between the radio network devices of the small local
network and the NEs in other networks.
This feature is based on the M2000 centralized user management function. The objects in a
large local network are grouped into different domains. System administrators can grant users
the authority to operate the objects in the domains. When users operate NEs through the M2000
client or the LMT, the M2000 authenticates user operations on the basis of the domain authority.
Only authorized operations are performed on NEs.
The management of a large local network involves domain management and domain authority
management. Only the system administrator has the authority to manage the domain and
domain authority.
Domain management
System administrators can add, modify, browse, and delete domains. After creating
domains, the system administrators can bind NEs and domains. A domain can contain the
objects that belong to different MSC Servers. An NE can also belong to multiple domains.
Domain authority management
A domain contains multiple users, but a user belongs to only a domain. Administrators
assign domain authority to users or user groups by binding them to a domain. Domain
authority is categorized into private domain authority and global domain authority. A user
belongs to only a private domain or a global domain. If a user has the authority of a domain,
the user can add, modify, and delete the objects in the domain. System administrators can
also unbind users (user groups) and domains.

WOFD-050100 M2000 Log Management


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

95

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Summary
The M2000 records the information about system running status in logs. Users can query,
export, and collect the statistics of logs. Logs help users to monitor and audit the running status
and executed operations of the M2000.

Description
Logs record the information about the running status of the M2000. Logs are categorized into
operation logs, system logs, and security logs.
Operation logs record the information about operations performed by users on the M2000
client.
Running logs record the operating information about the M2000 system.
Security logs record the following security-related events:
Events related to account management
Events related to account login
System events such as system startup and shutdown or events that affect system security or
system logs
Resource access events such as unauthorized access
This feature provides the following functions:
Collecting and storing logs
The database stores M2000 logs for a maximum of 90 days. Users can change the period.
If the M2000 log database does not meet the standard planning or the network size exceeds
the management capacity of the server, the M2000 may not be able to store the logs for 90
days. When the M2000 reaches the end of the storage period or disk capacity limit, the
M2000 automatically dumps M2000 logs to files.
Querying logs
The system allows users to query logs according to the preset conditions and displays the
query results. The M2000 provides various types of search criteria. Therefore, users can
easily view the required log information and save the query results in HTML, PDF, CSV,
or XML files. Users can save search criteria as a template.
Search criteria vary according to log types.
The search criteria for operation logs are terminals, operations, operated objects (NEs),
time, users, and operation results.
The search criteria for running logs are sources, severity, and time.
The search criteria for security logs are event severity, users, terminals, security events,
time, objects (NEs), and operation results.
Collecting log statistics
The M2000 collects log statistics and saves the statistical results to tables. Users can
customize the statistics by setting statistical items and filter criteria. Statistical items
include log types, users, terminals, operations, and results. Filter criteria are the same as
search criteria. Users can save statistical conditions as a template.
This function helps users to quickly learn about operating status, such as the period when
most user operations are performed and the most frequently performed operations.
Collecting and dumping logs
The system saves the information about NE logs to the database.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

96

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Exporting logs
This function allows users to export log information in the database to files. Log export
tasks are managed and scheduled by the centralized task manager.
The log export function contains two sub-functions, the latest data export and expiry data
export.
The latest data export function exports the log data that is generated recently to files for
analysis. Users can set the conditions of data export, such as task names, execution periods,
task valid time, file formats, and save paths. The exported log data is not deleted from the
database.
The expiry data export function exports the log data that are generated before a preset time
to files. After the data is exported, it is deleted from the database. Users can set the
conditions of data export, such as task names, task valid start time, storage duration of log
data (days), file formats, save paths, and whether to compress the file.
Both export modes support exporting log data to an XML, HTML, TXT or CSV file.

Enhancement
Logs can be exported to HTML and TXT files in M2000 V200R011C00.

WOFD-050300 NE Log Management


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Summary
This feature allows users to query and collect the statistics on the logs stored in the database.
The logs contain NE operation logs, NE security logs.
NE operation logs record operations performed by NE user, which help users to locate faults
caused by manual operations.
NE security logs record the security-related events such as logging in to the local maintenance
terminals (LMTs) of NEs, changing NE user rights, and adding NE users. These logs help users
to monitor the running status of NEs.

Description
This feature provides the following functions:
Collecting and storing logs
The M2000 collects subscribed log data from NEs using files and stores the data in the
database. It also allows users to manually collect and import NE log data that has not been
subscribed to, into the database. Both types of NE logs can be saved for a maximum of 90
days by default. Users can change the duration. If the disk configuration for the M2000 is
low or the space planned for the NE log database is less, users may not be able to store the
logs for 90 days. When the M2000 reaches the end of the storage period or disk capacity
limit, the M2000 automatically dumps NE logs to TXT files. NE log data dumping is
disabled by default because it affects the M2000's performance.
Synchronizing logs

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

97

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

By synchronizing the log information about the M2000 with that about NEs, the M2000
ensures the consistency of log information. The M2000 supports manual and automatic
synchronization. Both manual and automatic synchronization are performed through tasks.
Manual synchronization is triggered by users, and automatic synchronization is
automatically triggered through preset M2000 parameters. Automatic synchronization
tasks are managed and scheduled by using the feature WOFD-071200 Centralized Task
Manager. Users can set task parameters such as task start time, execution period, and NEs.
Users can also view the status and progress of a synchronization task.
Querying logs
The system allows users to query logs according to the preset conditions and displays the
query results. The M2000 provides various types of search criteria. Therefore, users can
easily view the required log information and save the query results in TXT, HTML, CSV,
PDF, XLSX, or XLS files. By default, the query results are saved in XLS files. Users can
save search criteria as a template.
Search criteria vary according to the log type.
The search criteria for NE operation logs are user names, user types, terminals, NEs, and
operation results and time
The search criteria for NE security logs are time, users, user types, security levels,
terminals, operation results, and NEs.
All the NEs that support NE log management support NE operation logs. Currently, the
RNC, NodeB, eNodeB, USU, eRelay, BSC6900 GSM, BSC6900 UMTS, BSC6900 GU,
SGSN, GGSN, MGW, and IP Clock Server support security logs.
Collecting log statistics
The system collects the statistics of log data and saves the statistical results to tables. Users
can customize the statistics by setting statistical items and filter criteria. Statistical items
include log types, users, terminals, operations, and results. Filter criteria are the same as
search criteria. Users can save statistical conditions as a template.
This function helps users to quickly learn about operating status, such as the period when
most user operations are performed and the most frequently performed operations.
Exporting logs
The M2000 exports NE log data generated within the latest time range to TXT files and
provides the files for other systems or users to analyze. Users can set data export criteria
such as task names, execution periods, valid time, file formats, and save paths. The
exported log data is not deleted from the database.

WOFD-040900 Single Sign On


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R010.

Summary
The OSS centralized user management function can centrally manage and authenticate the
users of Huawei wireless OSS systems, such as the M2000, PRS, and Nastar.
The single sign-on (SSO) server is deployed in the M2000 system, and an SSO client is
deployed on the client in each OSS system. Therefore, users can switch between the OSS
systems (M2000, PRS, Nastar) after logging in to the SSO server for only once. User groups are
centrally granted rights on the SSO server.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

98

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Benefits
Security administrators can centrally manage and authorize the users of the M2000, PRS,
and Nastar. This simplifies the operations of managing and authorizing users.
Users can switch between the M2000, PRS, and Nastar after logging in to the SSO server
for only once. When using multiple OSS systems, O&M personnel can use only one
account and password to log in to the OSS systems. This prevents repeated user
authentication.

Description
When M2000, PRS, and Nastar are deployed on a network, users can configure the M2000 as
the SSO server and install the SSO client on each OSS client. This ensures that the OSS systems
run in centralized authentication mode. With the SSO feature, a user logs in to an OSS system
once and gains access to all OSS systems without being prompted to log in again at each of
them. The SSO client communicates with SSO servers through the Lightweight Directory
Access Protocol (LDAP) and supports SSL encryption.
The SSO provides the offline login function. If the SSO server is faulty, a user can log in to the
SSO server by using the last user account recorded by the SSO client to manage the versions of
SSO clients. The user account, however, cannot be authenticated on the SSO server. In such a
case, the user can start a corresponding OSS client and use the local user account and password
to log in to the OSS. The user account and password are authenticated locally in the OSS.
In centralized authentication mode, the SSO provides a web-based user management GUI for
security administrators to centrally manage OSS users, such as OSS user registration and
authorization, and password complexity setting. The SSO server provides user management
services based on HTTPS to ensure data transmission security. Security administrators grant
users rights on a per user group basis. The rights of a user are determined by the rights of the
group to which the user belongs.
The SSO provides the LDAP-based interface (LDAP is short for Lightweight Directory Access
Protocol). Therefore, a third-party security management system can perform operations related
to user account management by using the LDAP-based interface on the SSO.
In centralized user authentication mode, all local users of OSS systems except the default
superuser are disabled. If the SSO server is faulty, the default superuser can log in to the SSO
client to obtain the user account of the latest login. Then, the M2000 automatically enables all
local accounts to restore the local security management function of the M2000, PRS, or Nastar.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature applies only to the Sun platform.

WOFD-000500 OS Hardening
Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R009.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

99

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Summary
This feature enhances the security of the M2000 operating system by disabling unsecured
operating system services, restricting access to files and directories, securing user accounts and
passwords, and adjusting kernel parameters.
OS hardening policies enable the M2000 to display a warning banner when users log in to the
M2000 using FTP or SSH. In addition, the hardening policies provide system logs related to
Inetd, FTP, cron tasks, and daemon process for users to tracing and audit the operations
performed on the operating system.
Before delivery, the M2000 performs security hardening on SUSE Linux and Solaris operating
systems according to default hardening policies. Some hardening policies must be manually
implemented in certain scenarios. For example, users must manually disable the remote login of
user root, set TCP Wrappers, and disable FTP services.

Benefits
The hardening policies protect operating systems against malicious attacks and enhance the
security of the M2000 system. These policies include hardening the security of application,
controlling the access to files and directories, adjusting kernel parameters, tracing and auditing
logs, and securing user accounts and passwords.

Description
The default hardening items are as follows:
Application hardening
This function lowers the system security risks by restricting the use of system services and
disabling unsecured and unnecessary services.
Solaris hardening policies include configuring SSH Daemon, disabling mail relay and
external listeners, configuring SNMP, enhancing the security of NTP services, disabling
RC services such as RPC and Apache, disabling traditional services such as SPC and auto
install, and disabling inetd services such as RSH, RCP, Telnet.
SUSE hardening policies include deleting unnecessary daemon processes, enabling the
Initd service, Xinet service, SSH encryption algorithm, SSHD accounts, secure SSH
authentication, and FTP security configuration, and limiting FTP users.
Log tracing and auditing
Solaris: The M2000 provides system logs for users to trace system activities. The system
logs include Inetd logs, FTP logs, debugging-level daemon logs, system log authentication
messages, cron logs, su logs, login failure logs, and kernel auditing logs.
SUSE: The M2000 provides system logs for users to trace system activities. The system
logs include info event logs, cron task logs, daemon process logs, and kernel message logs.
Kernel parameter adjustment
Kernel parameters determine the network configuration status and rights for applications.
Kernel parameter adjustment enhances the security of operating systems by adjusting or
configuring network options, disabling information dumping, and enabling protocol stack
protection.
User account and password securing
Securing user accounts and passwords is an effective means of protecting operating
systems against malicious attacks.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

100

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

User account and password securing policies for the Solaris operating system include
locking user accounts without passwords, disabling system user accounts, setting the
validity period for user accounts, forcing users to use complex passwords, using Message
Digest Algorithm 5 (MD5) to encrypt passwords, and setting the home directory to a
non-root directory.
User account and password securing policies for the SUSE operating system include
disabling system user accounts, using the hash algorithm to encrypt passwords, and
forcing users to use complex passwords.
System access, authentication, and authorization
This function enhances the security of operating systems by enabling users to set the scope
of user operations and the execution environment of key services.
The policies related to the Solaris operating system include details about using the main
console, account management activities, and recent failed login attempts.
The policies related to the SUSE operating system include restarting the system using the
keyboard, setting the timeout of idle sessions, setting the secure single-user mode, setting
SSH warning banners, and restricting login attempts.
File and directory rights
All applications and data in the UNIX and Linux systems are stored as files. A directory
that contains files is also regarded as a file. Therefore, the security of files and directories
is of great importance to the UNIX and Linux systems. This function enhances the security
of operating systems by setting rights for all the directories and files except the /proc
directory.
The policies for the Solaris operating system include checking the integrity of system files,
restricting the access to the system files and directories in the system directory, restricting
the access to key files and user home directories, setting system directory rights and
owners, and setting secure network-shared directories.
The policies for the SUSE operating system include restricting access to system
directories, files, and executable files, setting files and directories that have no owners,
restricting the use of the crob command, restricting the access to the PATH directories
(only user root is authorized to access the PATH directories), and setting ro mounting.
Warning banners
Warning banners are the messages displayed when users log in to the system using FTP or
SSH. The messages indicate the penalties for unauthorized access to the system. This
policy also hides system version information to protect the system against attacks.

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R011C00:
Optional security hardening
The following function is added to M2000 V200R010:
Hardening the SUSE operating system

Dependency
None

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

101

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

WOFD-000600 Database Hardening


Availability
This feature is introduced in M2000 V200R012C00.

Summary
This feature enhances Oracle database security by restricting the access to files and directories,
adjusting database parameters, locking unnecessary default user accounts, and preventing
common users from accessing system tables. This feature enhances Sybase database security by
locking unnecessary default user accounts, deleting unnecessary user rights information,
increasing password complexity, and using the minimum software installation. By enhancing
database security, this feature enhances M2000 system security.
Before delivery, the M2000 performs Sybase and Oracle database hardening based on default
hardening policies.

Benefits
This feature combines database and operating system hardening to protect the M2000 against
external attacks and enhance M2000 system security.

Description
Oracle hardening items are as follows:
Restricting access to files and directories
This function reduces database security risks and improves database service security by
restricting access to files and directories and preventing unauthorized users from accessing
or modifying database files and directories.
Adjusting database parameters
Database parameters determine memory usage and database listener configuration. This
function enhances Oracle database security by setting database parameters such as
database listener parameters.
Securing database user accounts and passwords
Securing database user accounts and passwords is a significant means of protecting the
database against external attacks. This function can be used to lock unnecessary default
user accounts.
Authorizing operations on system tables
This function enhances system security by setting database users' operation permissions
for some system tables. The policies include preventing common users from accessing
system tables and withdrawing the permissions of modifying system configurations.
Sybase hardening items are as follows:
Securing database user accounts and passwords
This function enhances database security by locking unnecessary default user accounts,
deleting unnecessary user rights, and enabling complex password policies and password
encryption algorithms.
Managing rights and sessions
This function deletes unnecessary user rights information.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

102

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Setting the system


This function enhances database security by encrypting message transfer, ensuring
message integrity, encrypting storage, using the minimum software installation, deleting
unnecessary components, and disabling Java.

Dependency
ATAE-based single-server and HA systems support Oracle hardening.
Sun-based single-server, HA, remote HA, SLS, and emergency systems support Sybase
hardening.

WOFD-000800 Anti-virus Solution


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R011C00.

Summary
Main risks that threaten OSS security include viruses, worms, and spyware. To prevent OSSs
from being attacked by these threats, Huawei provides antivirus solutions for Windows and
SUSE Linux operating systems by deploying third-party software.

Benefits
This feature protects M2000 and Citrix clients and servers from being attacked by viruses,
worms, and spyware and enhances the system's antivirus capability.

Description
OfficeScan 8.0 is deployed to provide antivirus protection for M2000 and Citrix clients and
servers that run on the Windows operating system.
ServerProtect for Linux 3.0 and Control Manager are deployed to provide antivirus protection
for M2000 servers that run SUSE Linux operating systems.

Enhancement
The antivirus solution applies to the ATAE cluster solution in M2000 V200R012C00.

Dependency
ServerProtect for Linux 3.0 provides antivirus protection only for ATAE-based M2000 servers.
OfficeScan 8.0, ServerProtect for Linux 3.0, and Control Manager are commercial antivirus
software and must be purchased individually. Third-party software and hardware configured for
the antivirus solution apply to OSS products such as the M2000, PRS, and Nastar after being
deployed one time. Therefore, users do not need to purchase the software and hardware for each
product.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

103

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

2.7 Topology Management


WOFD-060100 Topology Management
Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Summary
Topology management provides a complete overview of the M2000 network topology. The
topology view displays the networking and running status of devices. After an NE topology
object is created, it is added to the M2000 topology.

Benefits
Providing a complete overview of the WCDMA, GSM, LTE, and EPC network topology.
Providing a system portal, through which users are given direct access to NEs, improving
system usability.
Using subnets to represent the network hierarchy, improving visibility. Working with the
feature WOFD-040100 Centralized User Management and Authentication, the topology
management feature allows users to operate and maintain NEs based on regions and NE
hierarchy.

Description
The topology management module displays objects such as NEs, links, and subnets in charts
and navigation trees. It also provides functions of viewing configuration, alarms, and
performance data, starting the MML clients and LMTs, and synchronizing logs, configuration,
and alarm data
Topology view
In the topology view, the M2000 uses icons to identify different types of NEs. The
topology view consists of a navigation tree in the left pane and a chart in the right pane.
The navigation tree displays topology objects and their logical hierarchy. The navigation
tree shows each topology object and the hierarchy. The topology map in the display pane
shows all the topology objects and their basic information on the existing subnet,
relationship between the objects, alarm status of the objects, and KPIs.
Users can use the fuzzy search function to find and locate a topology object by using the
following keywords: object name, IP address, version, vendor, and position, cell name.
Users can create, add, and delete a topology object in the topology view. Users can create,
add, and delete a topology object in the topology view. In the topology view, different
icons represent different NEs and users can select an icon based on its size. The length of
the topology object name displayed in the topology view can be set. The settings take
effect only on this client. Users can change the background of the topology root view and
subnet view. The M2000 supports the background image in JPG or GIF format.
Administrators can export information about the root node, links, devices, and subnets to a
CSV file. Then, the M2000 provides this file for a third-party system to re-create a
topology.
Topology object

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

NE

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

104

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

If the device can be managed by the M2000, it is termed physical NE. If the device
cannot be managed by the M2000, it is termed virtual NE.
The M2000 is a special NE in the topology view.

Link
In the topology view, links are used to represent the physical or logical connections
between NEs.
Links are categorized into physical links and virtual links. Physical links refer to the
links connecting physical NEs. Virtual links are created by users. They are used to
represent the connections between NEs in the topology view. Currently, the M2000
supports links of the following types: M3UA, H248, BICCSCTPLNK, DATALINK,
MTP3, MTP3B, and FiberLink. M3UA, H248, and BICCSCTPLNK links are created
automatically and cannot be created manually. DATALINK, MTP3, and MTP3B links
need to be created manually.

Subnet
In the topology view, subnets are used to categorize NEs. In this way, a large network is
divided into several small subnets. Each subnet can contain a maximum of 500 NEs.

When creating objects, users need to set the properties of objects, such as name, IP address,
version, vendor, position, region, and description. The properties vary according to
objects.
The M2000 allows users to quickly create and delete NE objects in batches in the topology
view. In addition, the M2000 allows users to modify the longitude and latitude information
about NEs in batches in a file and import the file to the M2000 to implement the batch
modification.
The M2000 supports subnets. A well-designed physical subnet structure cannot only
picture the actual topology of the network, but also facilitate routine operation and
maintenance. The M2000 classifies a network into physical subnets by region, NE type, IP
address, and maintenance personnel.
NE and object status monitoring
The M2000 allows users to monitor NEs in the entire network in real time. Users can learn
about the status of the entire network in time by checking the alarm severities of NEs and
connection status between NEs and the M2000. The M2000 allows users to quickly view
the status of cells under GBTSs, NodeBs, and eNodeBs. It also provides shortcuts to
facilitate operations on cells, such as activating and deactivating a cell.

Enhancement
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R012C00:
The M2000 allows users to quickly view the status of cells under GBTSs, NodeBs and
eNodeBs and provides shortcuts to facilitate operations on cells
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R009:
The length of the topology object name that can be displayed can be set. The settings take
effect only on this client.
Users can change the background of the subnet view.
In the topology view, users can select an icon based on its size.
Modify the longitude and latitude information about NEs in batches by importing the file
to the M2000.
The following function is added to M2000 V200R008:

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

105

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

The M2000 allows users to export topology relationship data to a CSV file. The file is
provided to a third-party system for re-creating topology.
The following function is added to M2000 V200R006:
An IP-featured icon is used to identify the NodeB whose transmission mode is IP
transmission.

Dependency
The KPI values displayed in the topology view are provided by the feature WOFD-190100
Real-Time Performance Monitoring. If this feature is unavailable, the topology view does not
display KPI values.

WOFD-060200 NE Automatic Detection


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Description
The NE automatic detection feature allows the M2000 to detect lower-level NEs based on the
configuration data of an NE. For example, this feature allows the M2000 to automatically detect
NodeBs based on the configuration data of an RNC. Then, based on the detection results, the
M2000 creates NE topology objects and establishes connection with the objects. In this way, the
NEs are managed by the M2000.
The M2000 is a special NE. Therefore, this feature also applies to the M2000.
The system supports manual search and automatic search. After users create the topology object
of an upper-level NE, the M2000 automatically synchronizes its configuration data and
searches for its lower-level NEs after the synchronization is complete. The process is called
automatic searching. Manual searching is a mode based on which users trigger the process of
searching for lower-level NEs in the M2000 topology view.
Before enabling the NE automatic detection function, users need to ensure that the upper-layer
NE is connected properly to the M2000 server. For example, before using the NodeB automatic
detection function, users must ensure that the RNC, BSC6900 UMTS, or BSC6900 GU to
which the NodeBs belong is properly connected to the M2000 server.
The eNodeB automatic detection is implemented during eNodeB automatic deployment
(WOFD-280400 eNodeB Auto-Deployment LTE). Therefore, it is not included in this feature.
The M2000 can automatically detect the CORE ATCA NEs of the specified CGPOMU on the
physical topology view. After CGPOMU is created successfully, the CGPOMU automatically
searches for its sub-NEs. The detected sub-NEs are displayed in the topology view. If the
communication between the CGPOMU and its sub-NEs is abnormal, the sub-NEs fail to be
automatically found. In such a case, users can manually trigger the Search CORE NE function
of the CGPOMU to search for the sub-NEs.

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R008:
The NodeB automatic detection in IP-based WRAN networking mode

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

106

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

WOFD-060700 Wireless Transmission Devices Search


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R008.

Summary
Mobile networks contain a large number of transmission devices. Therefore, the M2000
manages the transmission devices such as optical fibers, microwave devices (for example,
RTN), and cables to perform centralized network management. To enable users to selectively
create and manage the required transmission devices, the M2000 provides the transmission
devices search function.

Benefits
Device search helps users find and create optical devices, microwave devices, and transmission
links. By using this function, users can find transmission devices and links that meet the preset
search criteria and create transmission devices and links on the M2000 quickly.

Description
By using this function, users can find all the transmission devices and links that meet the search
criteria on the network, select the required devices, and create the devices in the topology.
Users can create search tasks. The M2000 displays all the created search tasks in a list so that
users can start or stop the search operation on a task by selecting it from the list.
When searching for transmission devices, users can set the device IP address or the IP network
segment the device IP address is located on as the search criterion. The M2000 displays all the
searched optical devices or microwave devices in a list. Users can select one or more devices
from the list to create topology objects.
After creating transmission devices, users can create optical fiber links between Metro1000V3
and OSN3500. The method of creating transmission links is similar to the method of creating
transmission devices. Users should specify the target transmission devices and start the link
search. The M2000 displays all the searched optical links or microwave links in a list. Users can
select one or more links from the list to create topology objects. If the actual networking links
collide with the M2000 data, users can delete the networking links as required.

Enhancement
None

2.8 NE License Management


WOFD-070400 NE License Management
Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

107

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Description
The NE license management feature includes common NE license file management, NodeB
license allocation management, and eNodeB license management.
The common license management functions are as follows:
Viewing detailed license information
Transferring license files
Activating license files
Deleting license files
Backing up license files on a scheduled basis
The M2000 periodically backs up the license files that are activated on NEs. The M2000
centrally manages license backup tasks based on the feature WOFD-071200 Centralized
Task Manager. User can set execution time for license backup tasks. Currently, only the
BSC6900 GSM, BSC6900 UMTS, and BSC6900 GU support this function.
Activating license files on a scheduled basis
In non-RAN sharing scenarios, users can create scheduled tasks to deliver and activate
GBSC and RNC license files. The M2000 centrally manages license delivery tasks based
on the feature WOFD-071200 Centralized Task Manager. User can set execution time for
license delivery tasks. Currently, the RNC, BSC6900 GU, BSC6900 UMTS, and
BSC6900 GSM support this function.
Exporting license data on a scheduled basis
The M2000 exports license data about NEs to CSV files on a scheduled basis. The export
tasks are managed and scheduled centrally by using the feature WOFD-071200
Centralized Task Manager. Users can set the time and period for running a task. Currently,
this feature applies to the NodeB, BSC6900 GU, BSC6900 UMTS, and BSC6900 GSM.
Providing a northbound license file interface
The M2000 exports NE license data as an XML file on schedule. A third-party system can
obtain this file by using FTP. Export tasks for the northbound license file interface are
centrally managed and scheduled by using the feature WOFD-071200 Centralized Task
Manager. Users can set the time and period for running a task. Currently, this feature
applies to the eNodeB, NodeB, BSC6900 GU, BSC6900 UMTS, and BSC6900 GSM.
The NodeB license allocation and management functions are as follows:
Uploading and downloading NodeB license information between the M2000 server and
client
Allocating NodeB license information
All the NodeBs under an RNC use the resources specified in the same license file.
The M2000 allows users to upload and download license files between the M2000 client
and server and centrally allocate license resources to NodeBs in a RAN system.
Exporting and importing license information
Users can manually export the license data of a single NodeB or all NodeBs under an RNC
to CSV files. The exported file informs users about how licenses are allocated to NodeBs.
In addition, users can import NodeB license allocation information to the M2000.
Distributing NodeB license information
The M2000 centrally manages scheduled NodeB license delivery tasks based on the
feature WOFD-071200 Centralized Task Manager. Users can set execution time and
period for scheduled NodeB license delivery tasks. Users can also manually deliver
NodeB license information.
Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

108

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Setting NodeB license allocation threshold alarms


This function applies to NodeB resource licenses. On a RAN sharing network, when the
ratio of the total amount of license resources allocated to all of the operator's NodeBs to
the amount of resources specified in purchased licenses reaches the preset threshold, a
threshold alarm is generated. On a non-RAN sharing network, when the ratio of the total
amount of license resources allocated to all the NodeBs to the amount of resources
specified in purchased licenses reaches the preset threshold, the M2000 generates a
threshold alarm. When the ratio is within the normal value range, the M2000 clears the
corresponding threshold alarm. This function is disabled by default. Users can enable this
function according to actual requirements.
Disabling a NodeB license
The M2000 allows users to disable a NodeB license. After a NodeB license is disabled, the
M2000 generates a failure code that Huawei technical support personnel use to apply for a
new license. This significantly improves the efficiency of replacing licenses in cases such
as capacity adjustment, ESN change, user name change, and version upgrade.
On the M2000 GUI, users select an RNC and disable the license of the NodeBs under the
RNC. The M2000 returns a failure code and sends a failure notification to the NodeBs.
When the NodeB license is disabled, the license automatically applies a grace period of 60
days. Within the grace period, the NodeB license can be used properly, but it becomes
invalid after the grace period. Users can obtain the license status by viewing the NodeB
license information.
Allocating a trial NodeB license
If a user does not purchase certain features for a device, the user can use these features for
a trial period to determine whether to purchase the features. A commercial license
containing such features is called a trial license. The default validity period of a trial
license is three months. Trial licenses do not affect purchased license items in the
commercial license. When the trial license is used, each function of a RAN system can be
used only once.
When users allocate a trial NodeB license on the M2000, the M2000 delivers the validity
period of the trial license to NodeBs. Based on the validity period, the NodeBs confirm the
validity period of the features controlled by the license. The M2000 does not allow users to
allocate or adjust license items that exceed the validity period of the trial license.
eNodeB license management involves the following procedures:
Applying for a license
Installing the license file
Updating the license
Viewing license status
The M2000 provides the following functions for implementing these procedures:
Viewing license information
The M2000 displays detailed NE license information (such as NE license type and status)
on a list. Users can synchronize the latest NE license information from NEs to the M2000.
Loading a license file
Users download a license file from the M2000 to an NE for the license file to take effect.
Backing up a license file
After delivering a license file to an NE, the M2000 automatically backs up the license file
to the backup directory.
Exporting information to apply for a commercial license file

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

109

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Each eNodeB must be configured with an individual license file. Users export the eNodeB
type, ESN, license serial number (LSN), and the license allocation and usage information
during eNodeB commissioning to an XML file. The exported XML file serves as a
reference to applying for a new license file.
Exporting the information about adjusting a license file
After a commercial license file is configured for an eNodeB, the license file needs to be
updated because of network change or optimization.
The procedure for updating an eNodeB license file is as follows:
1.

Invalidates the license.

2.

Obtains an invalidity code.

3.

Exports information such as license usage, requirement evaluation data, invalidity code,
and ESN to an XML file.

4.

Applies for a new license file based on the exported information.


Invalidating a license
The procedure for invalidating an eNodeB is similar to that for invalidating a NodeB
license. Before updating the license information about an eNodeB, users must invalidate
the existing license to obtain an invalidity code, which is mandatory for applying for a new
license.

Enhancement
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R012C00:
Providing a northbound license file interface for eNodeBs
Backing up eNodeB license files
Backing up BSC6900 UMTS license files on a scheduled basis
Downloading NodeB license files from the M2000 server to the M2000 client
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R011C00:
Disabling a NodeB license
Allocating a trial NodeB license
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R010:
Delivering NodeB licenses on a scheduled basis
Delivering and activating the license files of the RNC, BSC6900 GU, BSC6900 UMTS,
and BSC6900 GSM on a scheduled basis in non-RAN sharing scenarios
Exporting the license data about the NodeB, NodeB, BSC6900 GU, BSC6900 UMTS, and
BSC6900 GSM on a scheduled basis
Immediately exporting the license data of the NodeBs under a selected RNC
Setting NodeB license allocation threshold alarms
Providing a northbound license file for the NodeB, BSC6900 GU, BSC6900 UMTS, and
BSC6900 GSM
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R009:
Managing eNodeB license information
Managing license information about BSC6900 UMTS, BSC6900 GSM, and BSC6900
GU

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

110

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Dependency
This feature applies to NodeBs in RAN6.0 and later versions.
By integrating with the feature WOFD-210200 Automatic File Upload, the northbound
license file interface provided in this feature allows the M2000 to upload alarm files to the
third-party and other systems.

WOFD-071600 NE Emergency License Management


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R008.

Summary
Generally, telecom operators can use only the network services that are restricted by license
resources. The requests for using the services that are beyond license control are denied by NEs.
The M2000 allows telecom operators to manually activate the emergency license function.
After the function is activated, NEs provide services with the maximum capability, and they are
not restricted by licenses.
After the emergency status ends, the capability of NEs is controlled by licenses again.

Benefits
With the emergency license function, telecom operators are able to provide proper services in
the case of emergencies when there is sharp increase in traffic, meeting the requirements of end
users.

Description
Telecom operators can manually activate or deactivate the emergency license function.
The M2000 enables the license to enter the emergency state by sending MML commands to an
NE. The license enters the emergency state immediately when the MML commands are sent,
and the state lasts seven days. Each R version of the RAN system can enter the emergency
license state three times. If the license has entered the emergency state three times, users must
upgrade the RAN software to use this function.

Dependency
This feature applies to RNCs in RAN11.1 and NodeBs in RAN13.0 and later versions.

2.9 Hardware and Software Management


WOFD-110100 NE Software Management
Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R002.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

111

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Summary
This function allows the M2000 to centrally manage the software, patches, OS patches, and
data files of NEs. Users can upload, download, load, activate, and synchronize the software,
patches, and data files, and confirm the software loading. The software upgrade can be
performed in stages.
The system supports the following upgrade modes:
Software upgrade of a single NE through the wizard
Batch software upgrade
External upgrade of one or multiple NEs
Software management expert

Benefits
This feature brings about the following benefits:
The M2000 provides a user-friendly GUI, which simplifies maintenance operations and
improves work efficiency.
Remote management is required for users to copy and operate software locally, reducing
maintenance costs.
The batch upgrade reduces a large amount of repetitive work and improves upgrade
efficiency significantly. In addition, errors caused by manual operations are reduced.

Description
NE software management allows users to manage different files of NEs. The file types are as
follows:
Software: indicates the software of the NE, including cold patches.
The patches of NE software are categorized into hot patches and cold patches. After cold patches are
loaded, NEs need to be restarted. After hot patches are loaded, NEs do not need to be restarted. Cold
patches are managed as special software.

Patch: indicates hot patches of the NE.


Data: indicates the configuration file of an NE.
Others: indicates the log files of an NE.
Software upgrade package: refers to the package used to upgrade RNC, BSC6900 GSM,
BSC6900 UMTS and BSC6900 GU. A software package contains the programming files
required for running boards.
Patch upgrade package: refers to the package used to upgrade RNC, BSC6900 GSM, BSC6900
UMTS and BSC6900 GU. A patch upgrade package contains the hot patch files required for
running boards.
Patch package of third-party software: refers to the package of third-party software, such as the
OS patch of BAM of RNC, BSC6900 GSM, BSC6900 UMTS and BSC6900 GU.
Upgrade risk check package: refers to the check scripts of the Software Management Expert. It
provides check items for software upgrade, such as upgrade path, version mapping, and

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

112

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

upgrade risk. The file types supported by the M2000 vary according to NEs. Table 2-4 provides
the details.
Table 2-4 File types supported by NEs
NE Type

Supported File Type

RNC

Software upgrade package, patch upgrade package, patch package of


third-party software, and LMT software package

NodeB

Software, patch, data, LMT software package, upgrade risk check package,
SPP package, and others

eNodeB

Software, patch, upgrade risk check package, and others

MSC Server

Software

MGW

Software, patch, and data

SGSN

Software, patch, and data

GGSN

Software, patch, and data

BSC6900
GSM

Software upgrade package, software upgrade patch, and patch package of


third-party software

BSC6900
UMTS

Software upgrade package, software upgrade patch, and patch package of


third-party software

BSC6900 GU

Software upgrade package, software upgrade patch, and patch package of


third-party software

GBTS

Software, upgrade risk check package, and patch

IP Clock
Server

Software

AG

Software and patch

HLR9820

Software

IWF

Software, patch, and data

UGW

Software, patch, and data

NE software management includes file management and software upgrade management. File
management allows users to perform certain operations on the files stored on the M2000 and
NEs to upgrade NE software. NE upgrade management provides various NE upgrade modes,
including wizard-based upgrade, task-based upgrade, software upgrade expert, and external
upgrade. These upgrade modes enable users to easily upgrade NEs. File management:
NE files can be stored on the M2000 file server for centralized management. Users can
browse and delete NE files and upload and download these files between the M2000 client,
server, and NEs. Users can create various file transfer tasks in a window for transferring
files in different directions and for different NE types and file types. In a file transfer task,
files of the same type can be transferred in one direction for the same type of NE.
Before uploading NE software from the M2000 client to the M2000 server or from the
M2000 client to the NE, the M2000 verifies the integrity of the software version according
Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

113

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

to the digital signature in the version package. If the verification fails, users are prompted
to determine whether to continue the upload.
The M2000 allows users to perform various operations on the files stored on NEs. For
example, users can check the version information and version package status of NEs. They
can also upload files to the M2000 file server, and load, activate, deactivate, synchronize,
uninstall, and confirm the files. The supported operations vary according to the file type.
File management allows users to upgrade NE software. To implement this, users first
download the NE software of the target version from the M2000 client or server to an NE,
and load, activate, and synchronize the software.
NE software upgrade:
Wizard-based upgrade allows users to upgrade the software and patches of a single NE. It
is supported by the MSC server and HLR9820.
The external upgrade allows users to upgrade the software and patch packages of a single
NE or multiple NEs by combining the M2000 single-step upgrade wizard and NE upgrade
tool. It is supported by the RNC, BSC6900 UMTS, BSC6900 GSM, and BSC6900 GU.
Task-based upgrade allows users to upgrade and roll back NE software and patches of
third-party software in batches.

Providing the NodeB, MGW, GBTS, GGSN, eNodeB and IP Clock Server with the
batch upgrade task. Users can upgrade NEs of the same type concurrently. A maximum
of 600 NEs can be upgraded at a time. To minimize the impact of the upgrade on other
services, the M2000 upgrades the NEs in batches, where 60 NEs are upgraded at a time.
Users can configure both upgrade steps and modes. Upgrade modes can be set to
instant tasks, manual tasks, or scheduled tasks. The M2000 allows users to perform
health check on the eNodeB at pre- and post-upgrade stages. By comparing the
pre-upgrade health check report with the post-upgrade health check report, users can
detect the impacts of the software upgrade on devices. For details about the check
items, see the feature WOFD-240100 Network Health Checking. Pre- and
post-upgrade health checks are optional.

The M2000 rolls back the versions and patches of MSC servers, eNodeBs, NodeBs,
and GBTSs in batches. It uses the specified software version saved in the main control
board on the NE side to perform the rollback without loading or activating the versions
and patches. The GBTS types support this function include BTS3900, BTS3900A,
DBS3900, and BTS3900L.

The M2000 provides a wizard for upgrading the patch packages of purchased software
for the BSC6800, BSC6900 UMTS, BSC6900 GSM, and BSC6900 GU in batches.
Users can upgrade the patch packages of purchased software for NEs of the same type
concurrently.

The M2000 provides the software management expert to manage the software upgrade
process of the NodeB, eNodeB, and GBTS. This function integrates operations such as
upgrade preparations, checks during the upgrade, and checks after the upgrade into a
process that meets O&M requirements. In this way, O&M personnel can upgrade a NodeB
by performing simple operations. The M2000 manages the upgrade process as a project.
The upgrade project has two phases: upgrade preparations and upgrade execution.
Upgrade preparations involve checking preparation information, feasibility and risks.
During the upgrade execution phase, NEs are upgraded in a mode similar to task mode.
Users create tasks to upgrade NEs in batches and in different time ranges. eNodeBs
support service verification after the upgrade.
When O&M personnel plan the upgrade of a version, they create an upgrade project, set a
target version, add the NEs that need to be upgraded to the same target version to the
project, and upload and specify upgrade risk check packages.. The upgrade risk check
package determines the check items required for feasibility and risk checks, such as the

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

114

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

upgrade path, version mapping, and upgrade risks. This function allows O&M personnel
to flexibly control the upgrade process of each NodeB in the upgrade project. For example,
they can repeatedly check the upgrade preparations of the BTS that fails to be upgraded.
They can also check a BTS that has not been checked and upgrade the BTS that meets the
upgrade requirements.
After upgrading an eNodeB, NodeB, or GBTS in task mode or using the software
management expert, users can view the reports on the comparison of pre- and
post-upgrade alarms and cell status in CSV format on the M2000 client. This facilitates
upgrade result analysis and verification.
After NE software is upgraded by using the software management expert or in
wizard-based or task-based mode, the M2000 provides an HTML upgrade report. This
report, saved on the M2000 client, records detailed upgrade procedures and execution
results, such as NE types, target versions, parameter settings, upgrade steps, and start time,
end time, and execution result of each step.
When a user creates an NE upgrade task, the M2000 performs a self-check on the CPU
usage. If the CPU usage is high, the M2000 prompts the user to choose other time for the
upgrade. Users can stop and restart upgrade tasks in batches.

Enhancement
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R012C00:
Verifying upgrades using the software management expert
Viewing pre- and post-upgrade cell status comparison reports after an eNodeB, NodeB, or
GBTS is upgraded
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R011C00:
Checking software integrity
Providing the software management expert for the NodeB, eNodeB, and GBTS
Providing reports for wizard- and task-based upgrade and software management expert
Creating file transfer tasks in batches
Stopping or retrying tasks in batches
Checking the M2000 CPU usage before the upgrade
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R010:
Rolling back GBTS and NodeB software and patches in batches
Providing integrity check and policy-specific upgrades for eNodeB software versions
Upgrading third-party software patches for the BSC6900 UMTS and BSC6900 GU in
batches
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R009:
Rolling back software and patches of MSC Servers and eNodeBs in batches
Upgrading purchased software and patches of BSC6900 GSM and BSC6800 in batches
Providing external upgrades for BSC6900 GSM, BSC6900 UMTS, and BSC6900 GU
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R008:
Managing MSC Server and eNodeB software
Applying 3900 and 3012 series GBTS patches

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

115

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Dependency
GBTS patch installation applies to GBSS8.1 and later versions.

2.10 Network Monitoring and Analysis


WOFD-021100 Local Interface Tracing
Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R003.

Description
The LMTs of NEs provide the interface tracing function, which traces signaling messages and
single UE signaling messages. The LMTs trace these messages in real time. Users can save the
messages as TXT or TMF files for offline browsing.
After starting the LMT of a specified NE in the M2000 topology view, users can monitor
network status in real time, and detect and locate problems in time by creating interface and
signaling link tracing tasks.
To ensure security of data transmission between LMTs and NEs, LMTs based on the iView
platform support SSL-encrypted transmission, and web LMTs support HTTPS-encrypted
transmission.

Dependency
This feature is implemented on the LMT. If the NE LMT is based on the iView platform, users
must install the NE LMT on the M2000 client before using this feature. If the NE supports a
web LMT, users do not need to install the NE LMT.

WOFD-021200 Local Real-Time Status Monitoring


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R003.

Description
The LMT of the NE provides the function of monitoring the status of NE in real time. The
results can be displayed in charts or through data. The running status of ongoing services and of
the M2000 system can be monitored. In addition, this feature supports exception analysis and
device maintenance.
After starting the LMT of a specified NE through the topology view of the M2000, users can
create real-time status monitoring tasks.
The monitoring function varies according to the NE type. The CPU usage of all NEs can be
monitored. The other items that can be monitored are as follows:

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

116

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

RNC and BSC6900 UMTS monitored items: includes CPU/DSP usage, block error rate
(BLER), port error seconds, connection performance, cell performance, and link
performance.
NodeB monitored items: include cell service resources, board service resources, uplink
frequency scanning, RTWP measurement, temperature, power, and clock test.
BSC6900 GSM and BSC monitored items: include CPU/DSP usage, bit error rate, port
error seconds, GPRS user plane traffic, Abis HDLC channel transmission resource usage,
cell performance, and DSP service resources.
AG monitored items: include port traffic information.
eNodeB monitored items: include cell performance, user performance, RRU performance,
and transmission performance.
To ensure security of data transmission between LMTs and NEs, LMTs based on the iView
platform support SSL-encrypted transmission, and web LMTs support HTTPS-encrypted
transmission.

Dependency
This feature is implemented on the LMT. If the NE LMT is based on the iView platform, users
must install the NE LMT on the M2000 client before using this feature. If the NE supports a
web LMT, users do not need to install the NE LMT.

WOFD-014300 Maintenance Mode Management


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R008.

Summary
The M2000 allows users to manage the life cycle of NEs by setting maintenance modes for NEs.
In this way, users can perform appropriate maintenance on the NEs according to their
maintenance modes. For example, users can distinguish common alarms and maintenance
mode alarms that are generated in scenarios such as network setup, expansion, and upgrade.
This reduces the impacts of maintenance mode alarms on monitoring common alarms and
improves maintenance efficiency. In addition, users can focus on the alarms that affect services.

Description
NE maintenance policies vary according to scenarios such as NE deployment, upgrade,
commissioning, capacity expansion, and normal operation. To meet maintenance requirements
in different scenarios, the M2000 provides a flexible mechanism so that users can adopt
different maintenance policies to maintain NEs based on NE maintenance modes. For example,
during deployment, upgrade, and commissioning, NEs will generate a large number of
unnecessary alarms. The statistics about the live network indicate that the ratio of the
unnecessary alarms to all generated alarms is greater than or equal to 85%. If these alarms are
not differentiated from common alarms, maintenance engineers may fail to identify important
alarms in time.
Users can set NE maintenance modes on the M2000. When the network is in a specified state,
users can set the status of an NE to the corresponding state on the M2000. The M2000 regards
NE maintenance modes as a type of index. Users can filter various NE data by maintenance

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

117

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

mode in scenarios such as processing maintenance mode alarms and filtering NEs in a topology
view.
Maintenance mode management: Currently, the default maintenance modes are common,
creation, upgrade, expansion, and commissioning. To meet specified user requirements,
the M2000 allows users to set 10 extended maintenance modes based on the five default
modes. Users can customize a maintenance mode by setting the name of an extension
mode. Users can define alias names for NE maintenance modes on the M2000, set and
query maintenance modes, and export them to CSV files.
Maintenance mode alarms: Alarms generated in other NE modes, except the "common"
mode, are regarded as maintenance mode alarms. After the maintenance mode settings
take effect, the M2000 handles alarms based on the maintenance mode identities in the
alarms reported by NEs. By default, the M2000 does not monitor maintenance mode
alarms. After receiving a maintenance mode alarm, the M2000 does not display the alarm,
generate an audio or visual alarm message, send an alarm notification, or forward the
alarm to a third-party system. In the alarm monitoring window, users can browse, query,
and collect statistics on maintenance mode alarms by maintenance mode. This meets the
requirements in specified scenarios.
Topology filtering: The M2000 allows users to query the maintenance modes of NEs in a
topology view and allows users to filter NEs by maintenance mode.

Enhancement
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R012C00:
Defining alias names for maintenance modes
Enabling the customization of maintenance modes for RNC, NodeB, BSC6900 GSM,
BSC6900 GU, BSC6900 UMTS, GBSC, and GBTS
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R011C00:
Querying the maintenance modes of NEs in the topology view
Exporting the NE maintenance modes to a CSV file
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R010:
The M2000 supports filtering NEs based on maintenance modes in the topology view.
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R009:
The management of maintenance mode is available for the BSC6900 GSM, BSC6900 GU
and eNodeB.
User can customize the maintenance modes of the eNodeB.

Dependency
This feature applies to eNodeBs in eRAN1.1 and later versions.
Users can use this feature in GSM networks only after they have purchased the corresponding
GBSS features.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

118

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

WOFD-031700 Radio Frequency Performance Check


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R008.

Summary
An excessive voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR) reduces communication distances, and the
power amplifier pipe may be burnt because the reflected power returns to the transmit power
amplifier. This affects normal communication. To solve this problem, the M2000 provides the
function of VSWR query, which allows users to remotely monitor base station VSWR.
This feature applies in the following scenarios:
In the early stages of base station deployment, Huawei GTS personnel use this feature to
test the project quality of the cooperation partner.
During the delivery of the entire network, operators use this feature to test the project
quality.
This feature is used in routine maintenance scenarios.
To improve O&M efficiency for RFs on the air interface, the M2000 introduces the functions of
detecting intermodulation interference and external network interference. Intermodulation
interference detection involves lossy intermodulation interference and lossless intermodulation
interference. External network interference detection occurs only on GBTS because only the
interference on the GSM network, which is caused by the CDMA network, can be detected.

Benefits
Compared with the traditional method of using measurement instruments to monitor BS
VSWRs, this feature allows users to remotely monitor BS VSWRs on the M2000 and therefore
reduces maintenance and labor costs.
The functions of detecting intermodulation interference and external network interference
simplify the troubleshooting process for customers based on the experience of RF experts. They
have unique values for improving network O&M efficiency.

Description
The VSWR query feature consists of the VSWR query and threshold settings. Currently
VSWR query applies to the GBTS, NodeB, and eNodeB.
VSWR query: Users can select one or multiple BTSs/NodeBs (under the same BSC/RNC) in
the query window to view the VSWR of the BTSs/NodeBs. They can save or print the query
result. The query result is saved in a CSV file.
Threshold settings: Users can divide VSWRs into multiple value ranges and set a display color
for each value range. After the colors are set, the M2000 displays the value ranges of the query
result in the user-defined colors.
The functions of detecting intermodulation interference and external network interference
involves setting detection parameters, starting or stopping the detection, and viewing the
detection progress and results. Users can save the detection results in XLS files.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

119

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Intermodulation interference detection applies to the GBTS, eNodeB, NodeB, and MBTS.
MBTS types include the MBTS(GU), MBTS(GL), MBTS(UL), and MBTS(GUL). External
network interference detection applies only to the GBTS.

Enhancement
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R011C00:
Detecting intermodulation interference and external network interference
Querying VSWRs of eNodeBs

Dependency
The VSWR query function applies to GBTSs and NodeBs in GBSS8.1 and RAN11.0 and later
versions.
The GBTSs that support this feature include BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3006C, BTS3002E,
DBS3036, DBS3900 GSM, BTS3036, BTS3900 GSM, BTS3036A, BTS3900A GSM, and
BTS3900C GSM.
The NodeBs that support this feature include DBS3800, BTS3900 series, and DBS3900 series.
External network interference detection applies to DBS3900, BTS3900, BTS3900L, and
BTS3900A.
The lossy intermodulation interference detection function is supported by BTS3900 and
DBS3900 series NodeBs and all eNodeB types.
The lossless intermodulation interference detection is supported by BTS3012, BTS3012AE,
BTS3006C, BTS3002E, DBS3900, BTS3900, BTS3900L, BTS3900A.

WOFD-081200 Centralized Resource Monitoring in Real Time


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R009.

Summary
The M2000 monitors the current network resource usage in real time through key counters,
such as CPU usage, GPRS user-plane traffic volume, and link status. The monitoring results are
displayed in charts. By using this function, users can learn about the device performance status
and system running status in real time.

Benefits
The M2000 supports various types of monitoring, which applies to various O&M
scenarios.
This feature allows users to learn about the device status in real time, and identify and
rectify faults in time, reducing the impacts of faults.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

120

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Description
Currently, the M2000 supports the real-time resource monitoring for GBSS, WRAN, and
eRAN NEs. Table 2-5, Table 2-6, and Table 2-7 describe the monitored items supported by the
M2000.
Table 2-5 Monitored items of GBSS supported by the M2000
Monitored Item

Description

CPU usage

The M2000 monitors the CPU usage of boards.


Therefore, O&M personnel can learn about the usage of
CPU resources.

Traffic on the GPRS user plane

The M2000 monitors the GPRS traffic on the DSP of the


built-in PCU.
The information to be monitored includes the uplink and
downlink GPRS traffic on the Um interface and Gb
interface. Therefore, users can learn about the load of
data services.

Abis HDLC transmission usage

Users can learn about the average TX and RX rates on


the HDLC link of the BTS that is configured with the
Abis optimization transmission. By monitoring the
information on the HDLC link, users can learn about the
resource usage.

DSP resources

The M2000 collects the statistics on and monitors the


number of transmission service types. Users can obtain
the actual numbers of TC service types and of
FR/HR/EFR/FAMRHR/HAMR/data services.

CPRI BER

The M2000 monitors the bit error rate (BER) for the
CPRI in real time and displays the BER data in a table
and chart. By viewing the table and chart, users can learn
the transmission quality of the CPRI.

Monitoring
the status of
IP links

PPP link
MLPPP group
FE/GE traffic
IPPATH link
SCTP link

The M2000 monitors the RX traffic, TX traffic, and


number of received error frames of a specified link. It
displays the traffic of the current link in a table and a
chart.
The M2000 monitors the RX traffic and TX traffic of a
specified link. It displays the traffic of the current link in
a table and a chart.

Logical port

Monitoring
the traffic of
GBTS

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Logical port
bandwidth

The M2000 monitors the bandwidth of a specified port


and displays the bandwidth of the current port in a table
and a chart.

MLPPP group
traffic

The M2000 monitors the RX traffic, TX traffic, and


number of received error frames of a specified link. It
displays the traffic of the current link in a table and a

PPP link traffic

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

121

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Monitored Item

Description

FE/GE traffic

chart.

IP PPP traffic

Table 2-6 Monitored items of RAN


Monitored Item

Description

IP link status

The M2000 monitors the RX traffic, TX traffic, number of received


packages, and number of transmitted packages for specified FE/GE,
PPP, and MP links. It displays the traffic of the current link in a table
and a chart.

Table 2-7 Monitored items of eRAN supported by the M2000


Monitored Item

Description

CPU usage

Monitors the CPU usage of base station boards, helping O&M


personnel learn about the CPU usage.

RRU performance
monitoring

Detects the RRU performance, including total output power, output


power of each TX channel and carrier, and temperature of the RRU
board and the power amplifier.

Cell performance

Monitors cell resource usage, including the total TX power of cells in


the downlink, service satisfaction, total throughput at the radio link
control (RLC) layer, number of services, number of UEs, resource
block (RB) usage, Inter-Cell Interference Co-ordination (ICIC),
multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO), time-domain interference,
frequency-domain interference, data radio bearer (DRB) statistics on
the air interface, downlink control information (DCI) status on the air
interface, hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) status, and
received signal strength indicator (RSSI) interference detection.

UE performance

Monitors UE information, including block error rate (BLER), power


headroom, channel quality, scheduling, RLC traffic volume,
throughput, active queue management (AQM), uplink power control,
and downlink power control, downlink reference signal received
power (DL RSRP), and downlink reference signal received quality
(DL RSRQ).

Transmission
performance

Monitors the traffic volume in the RX direction, the traffic volume in


the TX direction, and the number of received error frames on specified
links.
Displays in tables and charts the traffic information about current
Media Access Control (MAC) links, IP links, IP paths, Stream Control
Transmission Protocol (SCTP) links, Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)
links, and MLPPP links.
Supports User Datagram Protocol (UDP) testing and local and pass-by
traffic monitoring.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

122

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Monitored Item

Description

Clock quality test


and IP clock data
collection

Clock quality test collects raw phase data about the clock algorithm of
the current NE clock source, facilitating onsite troubleshooting and
maintenance.
IP clock data collection helps users to analyze the clock jitter model on
the live network, facilitating algorithm optimization.

Bit error rate of the


CPRI port

Obtains the bit error rate of the CPRI port in real time and helps users
quickly determine whether the problem is caused by the optical fiber or
BBU/RRU when a problem occurs at a site.

Table 2-8 Monitored items for the USU


Monitored Item

Description

CPU usage

Monitors the CPU usage of boards on base stations, helping O&M


personnel learn about the CPU usage.

Transmission
performance

Monitors IP links and performance.


Monitors the traffic volume in the RX direction, traffic volume in the
TX direction, and number of received error frames on specified
links.
Displays the traffic information about current links in tables and
charts.

The M2000 implements various types of monitoring functions by performing various tasks.
Users can control the monitoring process by creating, starting, stopping, or deleting tasks. The
M2000 supports a maximum of 30 concurrent monitoring tasks.
After a user selects a monitored item and sets the required task parameters, the M2000 sends a
command to NEs to start a monitoring task. NEs report the monitoring results to the M2000 in
real time. Then, the M2000 parses the monitoring results and saves the parsing results in the
database.
The M2000 displays monitoring results in a list or a chart. In the list, users can view the details
of each monitoring result. In the line chart, users can view the history status and trend of
counters.
Users can view the monitoring results through playback. After this playback function is enabled,
the M2000 dynamically displays the monitoring results in the receiving sequence. During the
playback, users can perform the stop, pause, forward, or backward operation and set the refresh
frequency.
With this function, users can view and analyze messages without manually dragging messages.

Enhancement
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R012C01:
Monitoring the bit error rate of the CPRI port for eNodeBs
Monitoring CPU usage, IP performance, and IP links for USUs

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

123

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

The functions of monitoring CPU usage, RSSI interference detection, and DL RSRP/RSRQ for
eNodeBs and monitoring CPRI BER for GBSS are added to M2000 V200R012C00.
Real-time centralized resource monitoring for eNodeBs and NodeBV2 is added to M2000
V200R011C00.

Dependency
This feature applies to the BSC6900 GSM, BSC6900 GU, and GBTS in GBSS9.0 and later
versions.

WOFD-240100 Network Health Checking


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R006.

Summary
This feature allows users to inspect NE devices, analyze alarms, and check the M2000 system
status. It also allows users to export check reports.

Benefits
This feature can implement the total check of the devices on the live network. Therefore,
users need to view only the check report to identify hidden device problems and take
preventive measures to ensure the normal operation of devices and improve the quality of
service.
Users can set a scheduled task to check the network in non-busy hours to reduce the
impacts on network services.

Description
Network health check is performed on the basis of tasks. Users can customize health check
tasks according to the actual requirements. Users can perform operations such as creating,
copying, manually performing a task, enabling the automatic task execution, and viewing the
task status. After a health check task is complete, a check report in HTML or DOC format is
generated.
To meet the requirements in different scenarios, the system provides the following preventive
maintenance and check items:
NE device preventative maintenance
The items required for device preventative maintenance vary according to scenarios. The
M2000 allows users to manage device preventive maintenance templates based on
scenarios. By default, the M2000 provides common device preventive maintenance
templates during scenarios such as maintenance, upgrade check, and device preventive
maintenance. NEs of different types support different default device preventive
maintenance templates. Users can also customize device preventive maintenance
templates and select check items based on scenarios.
Before the M2000 conducts device preventive maintenance, it checks the NE CPU usage:

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

If the CPU usage exceeds the threshold, the M2000 does not conduct preventive
maintenance and periodically checks the CPU usage.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

124

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

If the CPU usage is less than the threshold, the M2000 starts preventive maintenance.

This function prevents a CPU usage decrease during device preventive maintenance.
Health check reports are in HTML or DOC format. The M2000 supports the comparison
of device preventive maintenance results. The NEs that support this check item are RNC,
NodeB, GBTS, eNodeB, BSC6900 GSM, BSC6900 GU, BSC6900 UMTS, MBTS(GU),
MBTS(GL), MBTS(UL), AG, IP Clock Server, and the M2000 itself. Each type of NE
supports different preventive maintenance items:

Preventive maintenance items of the RNC and BSC6900 UMTS


Board status, cell status, status of the interfaces at the physical layer, signaling point
status, link set status, link status, route status, BAM server, clock, interface
configuration data, routing configuration, parameters for loading RNC subracks, host
program, patch, and the loading mode of the DSP.

Preventive maintenance items of the NodeB


Current NodeB type, NodeB version, quality of the NodeB clock, NodeB board
configuration, cell status, NEMU temperature, status of the power supply module, and
IPRAN status.

Check items of the BSC6900 GSM


Board status, interface status, link status, BAM status, BTS board version, whether
license resources exceed the limit, GBTS operating status, cell broadcast status, GPRS
cell status, subrack cable status, and the Ethernet adapter status of a board.

Check items of the eNodeB


eNodeB type, eNodeB version, hardware status, Ethernet port property, cell status,
environment status, and data consistency.

Check items of the GBTSTS patch, channel status, OML link, board status, VSWR,
and software version.

MBTS(GU)/MBTS(GL)/MBTS(UL) check items


MBTS health check items include MBTS type, software version, hardware status,
interface status, clock status, cell status, environment status, and configuration data.
An MBTS check report is generated on the basis of the check items of each
single-mode NE and the common check items of the NEs. MBTS(GL) check items
involve GBTS check items, LTE check items, and their common check items.
MBTS(GU) check items involve GBTS check items, NodeB check items, and their
common check items. MBTS(UL) check items involve LTE check items, NodeB check
items, and their common check items.

AG check items
AG check items include subrack and board information, versions of active and standby
software, hardware management status, device running status, resource status,
interface link status, online AP link status, and fault information.

IP Clock Server check items


IP Clock Server check items include versions of active and standby software,
consistency check of configuration data, device running status, system working mode,
board routing, port status, and fault information.

M2000 health check


The check items include versions of the operating system and of the patches, version of
the database, M2000 version, NTP server status, system time zone, disk status and
partition usage, available memory, cluster status, and status of the M2000 services.

Alarm check

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

125

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Both the M2000 and NEs support the alarm check function. Alarm check reports are in
HTML format. Supported check items include alarm trend, alarm TopN, alarm
comparison, alarm statistics, statistics about unacknowledged and uncleared alarms, and
statistics about BTS/cell faults. The statistics about BTS/cell faults are available only for
the RNC, NodeB, BSC, BSC6900 GSM, and BSC6900 UMTS.

Enhancement
The network health check for the eNodeB and the MBSC is added to M2000 V200R008.
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R009:
Checking NE CPU usage before starting device preventive maintenance
Device preventive maintenance management based on scenarios
The network health check of GBTS, MBTS(GU), MBTS(GL), AG, and IP Clock Server is
added to M2000 V200R010.
The network health check of MBTS(UL) is added to M2000 V200R011C00.

Dependency
This feature applies to RAN6.1 and GBSS7.0 and later versions.

WOFD-240700 Network Health Check CN


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R009.

Summary
This feature can be used to check the running status of NEs and the network. By viewing health
check reports, users can detect potential faults in devices and take preventive measures to
ensure the normal running of the network.

Benefits
This feature brings about the following benefits:
This feature can implement the total check of the devices on the live network. Therefore,
users can detect potential device faults by viewing the check report and take preventive
measures to ensure the normal operation of devices and improve the quality of service.
After a fault occurs on the network, maintenance engineers can perform NE health check
to quickly identify the causes of the fault.
Before and after an NE is upgraded, maintenance engineers need to use the health check
function to check the NE status and check whether the result is correct after upgrade.
Maintenance engineers can also use this function to check the result of NE patch upgrade
and NE preventive maintenance.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

126

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Description
Most NEs, such as the MSOFTX3000, UMG, SGSN, GGSN, HLR, and CSCF devices, support
the network health check. For the details about the NEs that support this function, see the
feature list.
The health check items include hardware status, NE version, and patch information, interface
status, link status, circuit status, route and subroute status, OMU status, basic configuration data,
office data configuration, and alarm information.
To facilitate the implementation of the function, the M2000 supports the health check by
scenarios. NEs and NE check items are classified into scenarios. The check items vary
according to scenarios, such as the upgrade scenario and the capacity expansion scenario.
Network health check is performed through tasks. Users can customize health check tasks
according to the actual requirements. Users can perform operations such as creating, copying,
manually performing a task, enabling the automatic task execution, and viewing the task status.
After a health check task is complete, a check report in HTML or DOC format is generated.
Network health check is performed through tasks. When configuring a task, users need to only
select a proper scenario and NEs to be checked, but do not need to specify check items. This
helps to check NEs in specified scenario. For example, when creating a task, users can select a
type of NEs or a specified NE, and set the running time of the health check task. The M2000
supports instant tasks, scheduled tasks, and periodic tasks.
After a task is completed, users can download task running report that contains the check results
for all check items.
The M2000 supports the function of comparing reports for users to learn the comparison of
check results. This function can be used to compare the check results before and after NE
upgrade.

Dependency
None

2.11 FARS
The features described in this chapter are used for quickly locating and solving network
problems. Private data such as IMSIs and MSISDNs will be used during the use of these
features. To protect data security, Huawei provides a data anonymization function. Users are
advised to perform related tracing tasks by following local laws and regulations, and take
proper measures to protect private data, for example, turning on the data anonymization switch
and deleting folders for saving tracing records after related operations are complete.

WOFD-081400 Tracing Task Management and Message Browse


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R008.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

127

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Summary
This feature provides tracing task management and task browsing functions. The task
management function allows users to create, start, and stop tracing tasks. The task browsing
function allows users to browse, explain, filter, play back, and store tracing messages.
The M2000 provides subscriber information anonymous policy management to encrypt IMSI,
IMEI, and MSISDN during signaling tracing. This protects subscriber data from being
disclosed.

Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:
Enhanced LMT functions with inherited existing functions.
Quick exception detection.
Improved fault locating efficiency.
Subscriber information anonymization policy management, which encrypts IMSI, IMEI,
and MSISDN for users, prevents plaintext display, storage, and transmission, and protects
subscriber data.

Description
This feature supports signaling tracing in task mode and provides task management functions.
This feature allows users to control the tracing procedure by viewing information about all
tracing tasks and performing operations such as task creation, startup, stopping, and deletion.
The information about each tracing task includes the task name, tracing type, creator, status,
start time, end time, network element, exception cause, and data source. In addition, signaling
tracing management supports real-time display of data amounts for tasks. The amounts of
collected data are displayed for collection tasks, and the numbers of collected signaling
messages are displayed for other tasks.
The M2000 supports a maximum of 100 concurrent subscriber tracing tasks. These tasks
include GBSS, WRAN, G&U CS, GBSS PS call, LTE, IMS, and NGN subscriber tracing tasks,
where a maximum of five concurrent GBSS PS call tracing tasks are supported.
The M2000 supports a maximum of 12 concurrent non-subscriber tracing tasks, including
detail subscriber tracing tasks and the non-subscriber tracing tasks of all technologies, such as
cell tracing tasks and interface tracing tasks. A maximum of one detail cell tracing task is
supported.
After a tracing task is started, NEs report traced messages to the M2000. Then, the M2000
analyzes these messages and saves analysis results to the database.
The M2000 supports the following functions on the traced messages:
Message browse
The analysis results for a tracing task are displayed in a list. The contents in the list include
message SN, report time, tracing type, message type, message direction, and message
contents. Users can set message colors according to the message direction and type.
Message explanation
Message explanation is to translate a binary message into a protocol frame structure,
which is displayed as a tree diagram. Users can view the message explanation.
Message filtering

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

128

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Users can filter tracing messages by message field, message byte, or information element.
Supported fields include message type, message direction, time, and interface type. An
information element is a node carrying service messages in the message tree generated
during message explanation. An information element is identified by a path.
Message storage and printing
Users can save and print all or selected tracing messages. Tracing messages are saved in
XLS, TXT, HTML, TMF, PDF, or CSV format.
Message export
Users can export the data about a selected tracing task to a TMF file. Messages in the TMF
file can be imported into the M2000 again.
Message comparison
Users can compare messages after the M2000 translates messages into protocol frame
structures. Signaling in two messages is highlighted in different colors.
Message summarization
The M2000 displays the summary about a tracing task, including tracing type, task name,
creator, traced NE, start time and end time, total number of messages, and total number of
MRs.
Message playback
Users can view collected tracing messages using the playback function. After the playback
function is enabled, the M2000 displays tracing messages according to the sequence they
are received. During the playback, users can stop, pause, rewind, or fast forward messages.
In addition, users can set intervals for refreshing messages.
With the playback function, users can view and analyze messages without manually
dragging messages.
Subscriber information anonymization policy management provides the following functions:
Enabling or disabling the anonymization policy: Users can enable or disable the subscriber
information anonymization policy on the entire network. After this policy is enabled, the
M2000 and NEs automatically encrypt the IMSI, IMEI, and MSISDN used in creating
tracing tasks and in messages to prevent subscriber data from being disclosed.
Updating cipher keys: After a new cipher key is delivered and takes effect on the M2000
and NEs, the M2000 and NEs use the new cipher key to encrypt IMSI, IMEI, and
MSISDN.
Checking consistency: Users check the status of the cipher keys and anonymization
switches on the M2000 and NEs and synchronize the status based on the check results to
ensure that the status is consistent between the M2000 and NEs.

Enhancement
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R012C01:
Real-time display of data amounts for tasks in signaling tracing management
Number of non-subscribing tracing tasks changed from 5 to 12
The following function is added to M2000 V200R012C00:
Saving traced messages as a TMF file
Subscriber information anonymous policy management
The following function is added to M2000 V200R011C01:

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

129

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Maximum number of concurrent subscriber tracing tasks reaches 100


The following functions are added to M2000 V200R009:
Message playback
Message filtering based on information elements

Dependency
This feature applies to all the tracing features in section 2.11 "FARS" except for the feature
WOFD-191700 Mass Trace Collection LTE.
Users can use this feature only after they have purchased the optional tracing features.

WOFD-080500 GBSS Subscriber Tracing


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R008.

Summary
GBSS subscriber tracing refers to the process of tracing the standard signaling messages of the
calls of a specified UE on the CS domain, for example, a VIP UE on the GSM network in a
certain time segment. By collecting and analyzing statistics of the call signaling messages,
users can locate call faults. A GBSS subscriber tracing task is used to trace the UE messages on
a single BSC.
The subscriber tracing applies to the following scenarios:
Rectifying call faults to handle customer complaints
Analyzing drive test data to locate network problems

Benefits
The user-friendly GUI makes operations more convenient. This helps O&M personnel
locate call faults effectively and helps telecom operators reduce O&M costs.
Real-time subscriber tracing allows O&M personnel to know the call signaling of VIP
UEs and drive test UEs in real time, which helps O&M personnel detect and locate faults
more effectively.

Description
The parameters involved in creating a subscriber tracing task are the task name, GBSC (single
option), UE number (single option), interface filtering setting (A/Abis/Um), start time and end
time. The GBSC refers to the general base station controller of GSM, and it does not represent
the specific NE type.
The default duration of a subscriber tracing task is one day, and the maximum duration is seven
days. Users can specify the start time and end time. After a subscriber tracing collection task is
started, the NEs trace call signaling on the CS domain according to the user setting and report
the call signaling messages to the M2000. The M2000 parses the signaling messages and stores
the parsing results in the database.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

130

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

In addition to the functions provided in the feature WOFD-081400 Tracing Task Management
and Data Browse, the M2000 also provides the function of extracting messages based on
information elements.
In many scenarios, users need to export the counters or fields generated during a call into a
report and submit the report to a third party. To meet the requirements in these scenarios, the
M2000 provides message extraction based on information elements. An information element is
a node carrying service messages in the message tree that is obtained through message
explanation. An information element is identified by a unique path.
Message extraction is performed on the basis of tracing tasks. Before extracting messages,
users need to specify a tracing task and template. The template specifies the information
elements based on which message extraction is performed. After starting message extraction,
the M2000 extracts the values of all information elements specified in the template from each
message and displays the extraction results in the message list. The message list displays all
message fields, and a column is added for each information element to display the value of the
information element recorded in each message. Message extraction results can be exported to
XLS, HTML, TMF, PDF, TXT or CSV files.

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R010:
Message extraction based on information elements

Dependency
This feature and the feature WOFD-190700 Subscriber Tracing of PS Call GBSS together
implement MS tracing in both CS domain and PS domain.
A GBSS subscriber tracing task is used to trace the UE messages on a single GBSC.

WOFD-080600 GBSS Cell Tracing


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R008.

Summary
The GBSS cell tracing refers to sampling the subscribers in conversation in a specified cell and
tracing the standard signaling of the sampling subscribers. By analyzing the tracing data, users
can evaluate the performance of the live network or identify network faults.
The cell tracing feature applies to the following scenarios:
Network status sampling analysis, which is used to optimize the network and to detect and
rectify network faults.
Drive tests during site deployment, which is used to locate network problems

Benefits
The user-friendly GUI makes operations more convenient. This facilitates network fault
detection and rectification and network coverage optimization, and helps telecom operators
reduce O&M costs.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

131

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Description
The M2000 provides the function of tracing the sample calls of a specified cell. The upper limit
of sample calls is configurable and its maximum is 16. Assume the upper limit is set to N and
the number of currently traced calls is N. In such a case, the M2000 does not trace the
subsequent calls. When a call that is being traced is terminated and the number of concurrently
traced calls is less than N, the M2000 automatically traces another new call.
The parameters involved in creating a cell tracing task are the task name, GBSC (one option),
cell ID (one option), interface filtering setting (A/Abis/Um/MR), number of call samples, and
start time and end time. The GBSC refers to the general base station controller of GSM, and it
does not represent the specific NE type.
The maximum duration of a cell tracing task is 1 hour. Users can specify the start time and end
time. After a data tracing collection task is started, the NEs report the call signaling messages of
the specified cell to the M2000 through a file. The M2000 parses the signaling messages and
stores the parsing results in the database.
In addition to the functions provided in the feature WOFD-081400 Tracing Task Management
and Data Browse, the M2000 also provides the function of extracting messages based on
information elements. In many scenarios, users need to export the counters or fields generated
during a call into a report and submit the report to a third party. To meet the requirements in
these scenarios, the M2000 provides message extraction based on information elements. An
information element is a node carrying service messages in the message tree that is obtained
through message explanation. An information element is identified by a unique path.
Message extraction is performed on the basis of tracing tasks. Before extracting messages,
users need to specify a tracing task and template. The template specifies the information
elements based on which message extraction is performed. After starting message extraction,
the M2000 extracts the values of all information elements specified in the template from each
message and displays the extraction results in the message list. The message list displays all
message fields, and a column is added for each information element to display the value of the
information element recorded in each message. Message extraction results can be exported to
XLS, HTML, TMF, PDF, TXT or CSV files.

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R010:
Message extraction based on information elements

Dependency
None

WOFD-081500 GBSS Interface Message Tracing


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R009.

Summary
By tracing, collecting, and listing standard signaling messages on the GBSS interfaces, this
feature provides data support for routine maintenance, commissioning, and fault location.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

132

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

GBSS interface message tracing includes:


A interface tracing
Um and Abis interface tracing in the CS domain
Um and Abis interface tracing in the PS domain
PTP, SIG, and NS message tracing over the Gb interface

Benefits
The task mode used in this feature facilitates interface tracing, data collection, and task
management.
User-friendly GUIs and convenient operations enable rapid detection of call problems and
equipment interconnection problems.

Description
The maximum duration of an interface tracing task is 1 hour. Users can specify the start time
and end time. After a tracing task is started, the NE traces the messages on a specified interface
and reports them to the M2000. The M2000 parses these messages and saves the results in the
database.
In addition to the functions provided in the feature WOFD-081400 Tracing Task Management
and Data Browse, the M2000 also provides the function of extracting messages based on
information elements. In many scenarios, users need to export the counters or fields generated
during a call into a report and submit the report to a third party. To meet the requirements in
these scenarios, the M2000 provides message extraction based on information elements. An
information element is a node carrying service messages in the message tree that is obtained
through message explanation. An information element is identified by a unique path.
Message extraction is performed on the basis of tracing tasks. Before extracting messages,
users need to specify a tracing task and template. The template specifies the information
elements based on which message extraction is performed. After starting message extraction,
the M2000 extracts the values of all information elements specified in the template from each
message and displays the extraction results in the message list. The message list displays all
message fields, and a column is added for each information element to display the value of the
information element recorded in each message. Message extraction results can be exported to
XLS, HTML, TMF, PDF, TXT or CSV files.

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R012C00:
NS message tracing over the Gb interface
The following function is added to M2000 V200R010:
Message extraction based on information elements

Dependency
None

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

133

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

WOFD-080700 WRAN Subscriber Tracing


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R008.

Summary
The WRAN subscriber tracing can trace the signaling messages generated on the RNC side
during the call of a single UE. When creating a subscriber tracing, users can start connection
performance monitoring to observe the measurement data during calls.
A WRAN subscriber tracing task is used to trace the UE messages on a single RNC.
The subscriber tracing applies to the following scenarios:
Rectifying call faults to handle customer complaints
Analyzing drive test data to locate network problems

Benefits
The user-friendly GUI makes operations more convenient. This helps O&M personnel locate
call faults effectively and helps telecom operators reduce O&M costs.
Real-time subscriber tracing allows O&M personnel to know the call signaling of VIP UEs and
drive test UEs in real time, which helps O&M personnel detect and locate faults more
effectively.

Description
The WRAN subscriber tracing can trace the signaling messages of a single UE. The interfaces
that can be traced are Iu, Iur, Iub, and Uu. Users can specify the message types to be traced
according to the interface type.
The parameters involved in creating a subscriber tracing task are the task name, RNC (single
option), UE number (single option), interface filtering setting (Iub/Iur/Iu/Uu), start time and
end time.
The duration of a subscriber tracing task is one day by default, and the maximum duration is
seven days. Users can specify the start time and end time. After a data tracing task is started, the
NEs trace call signaling according to the user setting, monitor the signaling, and report the call
signaling messages to the M2000. The M2000 parses the signaling messages and stores the
parsing results in the database.
In addition to the functions provided in the feature WOFD-081400 Tracing Task Management
and Data Browse, the M2000 also provides the function of extracting messages based on
information elements. In many scenarios, users need to export the counters or fields generated
during a call into a report and submit the report to a third party. To meet the requirements in
these scenarios, the M2000 provides message extraction based on information elements. An
information element is a node carrying service messages in the message tree that is obtained
through message explanation. An information element is identified by a unique path.
Message extraction is performed on the basis of tracing tasks. Before extracting messages,
users need to specify a tracing task and template. The template specifies the information
elements based on which message extraction is performed. After starting message extraction,
the M2000 extracts the values of all information elements specified in the template from each

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

134

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

message and displays the extraction results in the message list. The message list displays all
message fields, and a column is added for each information element to display the value of the
information element recorded in each message. Message extraction results can be exported to
XLS, HTML, TMF, PDF, TXT or CSV files.

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R010:
Message extraction based on information elements
The following function is added to M2000 V200R009:
WRAN subscriber tracing of BSC6900 GU and BSC6900 UMTS

Dependency
A WRAN subscriber tracing task is used to trace the UE messages on a single RNC.

WOFD-080800 WRAN Integrative Message Tracing


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R008.

Summary
WRAN integrated tracing is classified into integrated subscriber tracing (detail subscriber
tracing) and integrated cell tracing (detail cell tracing).
Integrated subscriber tracing is used to collect the standard signaling messages and
Huawei-defined signaling messages of the calls of a UE. The signaling messages on both the
RNC side and the NodeB side are collected.
Integrated cell tracing is used to collect the standard signaling messages and Huawei-defined
signaling messages of multiple sample calls in a cell. The signaling messages on both the RNC
side and the NodeB side are collected.

Benefits
This feature provides telecom operators with signaling message collection interfaces, which
facilitate network fault localization by providing data support.

Description
Integrated subscriber tracing is used to trace the signaling messages on the RNC and NodeB
sides during a call. Both standard and Huawei-defined signaling messages are traced.
Integrated cell tracing is used to collect sample calls in a specified cell and trace the signaling
messages of the sample calls on the RNC and NodeB sides. Standard signaling messages, user
plane signaling messages, and control plane signaling messages are traced.
The parameters involved in creating an integrated subscriber tracing are the task name, RNC
(single option), UE number (single option), interface filtering setting (Iub/Iur/Iu/Uu), start time
and end time, and NodeB message type filtering setting.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

135

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

The parameters involved in creating an integrated cell tracing task are the task name, RNC
(single option), cell ID, number of sample calls, event type filtering setting, RAB parameter
(service type/RAB submission sequence/RAB maximum uplink and downlink rates/RAB
uplink and downlink guaranteed rate), RRC parameter (setup cause/RRC localization
type/NBAP sharing/UE quality), start time and end time, and NodeB message type filtering.
The maximum duration of an integrative message tracing and collecting task is eight hours,
while the default duration is four hours. Users can specify the start time and end time. After a
tracing task is started, NEs trace signaling messages and monitor the performance based on the
settings of UEs and report the messages to the M2000. The M2000 saves the messages on the
server as files. Users can export the data in the files and use the tracing review tool to view the
data. Therefore, integrative message tracing does not support the data browse function in the
feature WOFD-081400 Tracing Task Management and Data Browse.

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R011C01:
The maximum duration of an integrated message tracing and collecting task changes from
1 hour to 8 hours.
The following function is added to M2000 V200R009:
WRAN integrative message tracing of BSC6900 GU and BSC6900 UMTS

Dependency
A WRAN integrative message tracing task is used to trace the messages on a single RNC and
NodeBs under the RNC.

WOFD-080900 WRAN Cell Tracing


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R008.

Summary
WRAN cell tracing refers to the process of sampling tracing of the in-traffic UEs in a specified
cell and tracing the standard signaling messages on the interfaces including Iur, Iub, Iu and UU
reported by an RNC during a sample call. By collecting statistics and analyzing the sampling
data, users can evaluate the performance and faults of the live network.
The cell tracing feature applies to the following scenarios:
Network status sampling analysis, which is used to optimize the network and to detect and
rectify network faults.
Drive tests during site deployment, which is used to locate network problems

Benefits
The user-friendly GUI makes operations more convenient. This facilitates network fault
detection and rectification and network coverage optimization, and helps telecom operators
reduce O&M costs.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

136

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Description
The M2000 provides the function of tracing the sample calls of a specified cell. The upper limit
of the number of sample calls is configurable and its maximum is 50. Assume the upper limit is
set to N and the number of currently traced calls is N. In such a case, the M2000 does not trace
the subsequent calls. When a call that is being traced is terminated and the number of
concurrently traced calls is less than N, the M2000 automatically traces another new call.
The parameters involved in creating a cell tracing task are the task name, RNC (single option),
cell ID (multiple options), number of sample calls, event type filtering setting, RAB parameter
(service type/RAB submission sequence/RAB maximum uplink and downlink rates/RAB
uplink and downlink guaranteed rate), RRC parameter (setup cause/RRC localization
type/NBAP sharing/UE quality), and start time and end time.
The maximum duration of a cell tracing task is 1 hour. Users can specify the start time and end
time. After a data tracing task is started, the NEs sample the calls in a cell based on the settings
of users, trace the standard signaling messages of the sample calls, and report the call signaling
messages to the M2000 as a file. The M2000 parses the signaling messages and stores the
parsing results in the database.
In addition to the functions provided in the feature WOFD-081400 Tracing Task Management
and Data Browse, the M2000 also provides the function of extracting messages based on
information elements. In many scenarios, users need to export the counters or fields generated
during a call into a report and submit the report to a third party. To meet the requirements in
these scenarios, the M2000 provides message extraction based on information elements. An
information element is a node carrying service messages in the message tree that is obtained
through message explanation. An information element is identified by a unique path.
Message extraction is performed on the basis of tracing tasks. Before extracting messages,
users need to specify a tracing task and template. The template specifies the information
elements based on which message extraction is performed. After starting message extraction,
the M2000 extracts the values of all information elements specified in the template from each
message and displays the extraction results in the message list. The message list displays all
message fields, and a column is added for each information element to display the value of the
information element recorded in each message. Message extraction results can be exported to
XLS, HTML, TMF, PDF, TXT or CSV files.

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R010:
Message extraction based on information elements
The following function is added to M2000 V200R009:
WRAN cell tracing of BSC6900 GU and BSC6900 UMTS

Dependency
A WRAN cell tracing task is used to trace the call messages on a single RNC.

WOFD-081300 Centralized Interface Tracing LTE


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R008.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

137

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Summary
By using this feature, the M2000 can trace and display the interface messages and the link
messages to provide the effective data support for routine maintenance, commissioning, and
fault localization of devices.
The LTE provides the following interface tracing tasks:
Tracing tasks of standard interface messages: S1 interface tracing, X2 interface tracing,
and Uu interface tracing
Tracing tasks of transport network layer protocol messages: SCTP tracing, PPP tracing,
LACP tracing, 802.1X tracing, OAM3AH tracing, GTPU tracing, MP tracing, IKE tracing,
CFM, CMPV2 tracing, and IP tracing.
The USU provides the following signaling tracing tasks:
Tracing tasks of the transport network layer: OAM3AH tracing, CFM tracing, and IP layer
protocol tracing.
Message collection: MAC message tracing.

Benefits
By using this feature, the M2000 collects tracing data on interfaces such as the S1 and X2
interfaces in tasks. This helps users trace data and monitor task status.
This feature provides a user-friendly GUI, which allows users to quickly locate call faults
and solve problems related to device interconnection.

Description
The maximum duration of an interface tracing task is 12 hours. Users can specify the start time
and end time. After a tracing task is started, NEs trace the messages of a specified object or a
specified interface and report the messages to the M2000. The M2000 parses these messages
and saves the parsing results in the database.
In addition to the functions provided in the feature WOFD-081400 Tracing Task Management
and Data Browse, the M2000 also provides the function of extracting messages based on
information elements. In many scenarios, users need to export the counters or fields generated
during a call into a report and submit the report to a third party. To meet the requirements in
these scenarios, the M2000 provides message extraction based on information elements. An
information element is a node carrying service messages in the message tree that is obtained
through message explanation. An information element is identified by a unique path.
Message extraction is performed on the basis of tracing tasks. Before extracting messages,
users need to specify a tracing task and template. The template specifies the information
elements based on which message extraction is performed. After starting message extraction,
the M2000 extracts the values of all information elements specified in the template from each
message and displays the extraction results in the message list. The message list displays all
message fields, and a column is added for each information element to display the value of the
information element recorded in each message. Message extraction results can be exported to
XLS, HTML, TMF, PDF, TXT or CSV files.

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R012C01:
Signaling tracing supported by the USU

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

138

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

The following function is added to M2000 V200R012C00:


IP protocol message tracing at the transport network layer
The following function is added to M2000 V200R011C00:
Tracing of transport network layer protocol messages: PPP tracing, LACP tracing, 802.1X
tracing, OAM3AH tracing, GTPU tracing, MP tracing, IKE tracing, CFM, and CMPV2
tracing
The following function is added to M2000 V200R010:
Message extraction based on information elements

Dependency
None

WOFD-191200 Centralized Subscriber Tracing LTE


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R008.

Summary
The subscriber tracing refers to tracing the signaling messages of all the calls of a specified UE
(for example, a VIP UE) on the network within a certain period. By collecting and analyzing
statistics of the call signaling messages, users can locate call faults.
This feature supports subscriber tracing across multiple eNodeBs. After the subscriber tracing
is triggered on the core network, the eNodeB where the traced UE resides reports the call
message to the M2000. Then, the M2000 collects and displays the subscriber tracing messages
of multiple eNodeBs.

Benefits
This feature brings about the following benefits:
The user-friendly GUI makes operations more convenient. This helps O&M personnel
locate call faults effectively and helps telecom operators reduce O&M costs.
Real-time subscriber tracing allows O&M personnel to learn about the call messages of
VIP UEs and drive test UEs in real time. This helps O&M personnel detect and locate
faults more effectively and therefore improves user satisfaction.
The M2000 supports UE signaling tracing across multiple NEs. This allows users to trace
all the signaling of a call by creating a task.

Description
Before creating a subscriber tracing task, users need to start the subscriber tracing, obtain the
tracing reference number from the CN, and enter the tracing reference number on the M2000 to
create the tracing task. After the tracing task is started, NEs trace the call messages of a
specified UE and report the messages to the M2000. The M2000 parses these messages and
saves the parsing results in the database. The duration of a subscriber tracing task is one day by
default, and the maximum duration is seven days. Users can specify the start time and end time.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

139

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

In addition to the functions provided in the feature WOFD-081400 Tracing Task Management
and Data Browse, the M2000 also provides the function of extracting messages based on
information elements.
In many scenarios, users need to export the counters or fields generated during a call into a
report and submit the report to a third party. To meet the requirements in these scenarios, the
M2000 provides message extraction based on information elements. An information element is
a node carrying service messages in the message tree that is obtained through message
explanation. An information element is identified by a unique path.
Message extraction is performed on the basis of tracing tasks. Before extracting messages,
users need to specify a tracing task and template. The template specifies the information
elements based on which message extraction is performed. After starting message extraction,
the M2000 extracts the values of all information elements specified in the template from each
message and displays the extraction results in the message list. The message list displays all
message fields, and a column is added for each information element to display the value of the
information element recorded in each message. Message extraction results can be exported to
XLS, HTML, TMF, PDF, TXT or CSV files.

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R010:
Message extraction based on information elements

Dependency
None

WOFD-191600 Centralized Cell Tracing LTE


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R010.

Summary
Cell tracing is a process of tracing the call signaling of UEs that are live in one or multiple
specified cells. The M2000 collects the cell tracing data to provide data source for users to
evaluate the performance of the live network or diagnose network faults.
The cell tracing feature applies to the following scenarios:
Sampling and analyzing network performance to optimize the network or identify and
rectify network faults
Performing drive tests during site deployment to locate network problems
Adjusting and verifying cell configuration parameters

Benefits
The user-friendly GUI simplifies operations and helps O&M personnel to effectively identify
and rectify call faults. It also helps telecom operators to reduce O&M costs.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

140

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Description
Using the centralized cell tracing feature, users can collect call signaling tracing messages
generated in one or multiple cells within a specified period. In addition, users can collect radio
measurement data during calls. Signaling tracing messages include standard messages specified
by the 3GPP specifications and traced at the application layer over S1, X2, and Uu interfaces.
Radio measurement data includes MRs for Uu interfaces.
Centralized cell tracing allows users to collect data at three levels specified by the 3GPP
specifications: minimum, medium, and maximum. Users can collect MRs only at medium and
maximum levels. The maximum duration for a tracing task is seven days. Users can set start
time and end time for a task. In addition, users can specify the period for collecting periodic
events on the M2000.

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R012C00:
Allowing users to specify the period for collecting periodic events.
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R011C01:
A tracing task can run for a maximum of seven consecutive days.
The following function is added to M2000 V200R011C00:
Supporting the data browse function in the feature WOFD-081400 Tracing Task
Management and Data Browse.

Dependency
None

2.12 Base Station Commissioning Management


WOFD-280200 NodeB Auto-Deployment WRAN
Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R008.

Summary
In addition to hardware installation, commissioning devices and services is an important step
during the deployment or upgrade of the NodeB. Both installation personnel and
commissioning personnel must be on site to deploy a new NodeB or upgrade the current
NodeB.
The automatic NodeB deployment is the end-to-end deployment that is implemented through
automatic NodeB detection, upgrade, configuration, and service verification. This solution
improves the automation of NodeB deployment and reduces the frequency and complexity of
manual operations, which significantly reduces the workforce cost of NodeB deployment.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

141

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Benefits
This feature brings about the following benefits:
The time on NodeB deployment is reduced, while the deployment efficiency is improved.
The NodeB deployment cost is reduced.
The qualifications required for NodeB deployment engineers are lowered.
Users do not need to frequently enter the site.
The time for identifying and locating problems during NodeB deployment is shortened.
The possibility of manual errors is reduced.

Description
The remote commissioning function is applied in the following scenarios:
Add or move a NodeB
Network adjustment
NodeB upgrade
Network adjustments for NodeB occur frequently. The minimum configuration on transmission
is applied at the early stage of network construction. With the development of the services, the
network topology changes frequently. For example, the link topology changes to the star
topology. After the network topology changes, users need to commission the devices, such as
upgrading software, configuring data, and checking services and status.
To implement the automatic deployment and commissioning of NodeBs, the M2000 provides
the following automatic NodeB deployment solutions:
Solution I: Remote and automatic commissioning
Before automatic NodeB commissioning, the installation, configuration, and commissioning of
the M2000 and related RNC must be complete. In addition, the NodeB must be installed,
powered on and assigned IP address.
The procedure of NodeB commissioning is as follows:
The M2000 automatically detects all the NodeBs on the live network and connects to these
NodeBs.
The M2000 operators select the NodeBs to be commissioned and commissioning items
through the wizard for setting the commissioning task. The items include downloading
and activating software, downloading configuration files, and performing health check.
The M2000 automatically triggers the commissioning task according to the settings. The
process takes little time and does not require manual operations.
Site operators can validate the services by making calls. If the validation is passed, the
field operators inform the M2000 operators that they are ready to leave the site.
The M2000 operators check the NodeB commissioning report generated by the M2000. If
the commissioning items, status, and performance of objects are proper, the site operators
can leave the site.
Solution II: End-to-end NodeB auto-deployment
The M2000 provides the end-to-end NodeB deployment solution and supports automatic
NodeB monitoring and service verification. This reduces the frequency and complexity of
manual operations. Before deploying a NodeB, ensure that:

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

142

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

The target software version and configuration data of the NodeB are uploaded to the
M2000.
The transmission between the NodeBs and the M2000 is proper.
Automatic NodeB deployment involves the following procedures, which can be customized
based on application scenarios. The steps of assigning NodeB IP addresses and automatic
configuration can be performed locally by using the USB flash drive or the LMT. Subsequent
steps such as status monitoring and service verification must be performed on the M2000. The
methods for assigning IP addresses through the DHCP and AACP do not apply to ATM-based
NodeBs. In such cases, the NodeBs can obtain IP addresses by using the USB flash drive or the
BOOTP.
Automatic IP addresses assignment to the NodeBs
Engineers import the NodeB deployment list to the M2000. This list contains the required
deployment information such as the NodeB names, target version numbers, ESNs, IP
addresses. After O&M personnel select target NodeBs on the M2000 GUI and start
deployment, the M2000 automatically checks whether the required data is available. If no
exception occurs, the deployment is automatically performed without human intervention.
Then, the M2000 assigns IP addresses to the NodeBs through AACP and DHCP and
connects to the NodeBs.
Automatic NodeB configuration
The M2000 sends software upgrade commands to the NodeBs. The NodeBs automatically
download the software from the M2000. Then, the NodeBs upgrade the software and load
the data.
NodeB status monitoring and fault diagnosis
The purpose of NodeB status monitoring is to check whether the service verification can
be performed during the NodeB deployment and to monitor NodeB status during the
whole deployment process. The M2000 automatically triggers service verification once it
detects an available logical cell.
Before verifying services, the M2000 monitors NodeB alarms, checks installation and
deployment quality, and continuously checks the availability of logical cells. In addition,
the M2000 allows users to view alarm information based on object categories, such as
cells, boards, and links. Users can also start fault diagnosis for boards, physical
transmission ports, and antennas based on problem locating requirements.
Service verification
The service verification involves the verification of air interface service, AMR, VP, PS
conversation, PS background, PS interactive, PS streaming, HSDPA, and HSUPA. The
service verification is based on the data obtained through a dialing test or based on the
subscriber data on the live network.
After triggering service verification, the M2000 sends commands to the NodeBs for
collecting the traffic statistics of a cell and checks whether the services of this cell are
normal based on the received statistics. If all the cells of a NodeB have passed the service
verification, the M2000 determines that this NodeB has passed the service verification.
After confirming that NodeB services are normal, engineers need to confirm that the
deployment is complete. In such a case, the M2000 stops verifying services and
monitoring NodeB status.
Check of an O&M IP address
During the planning of a NodeB IP address, the NodeB ESN must map the corresponding
IP address. During site deployment by using the USB flash drive, however, the IP address
is apt to be misconfigured. Therefore, after engineers confirm that the NodeB deployment
is complete, the M2000 automatically checks the O&M IP address. The M2000 checks the
NodeB ESN that is obtained in two modes. If the two ESNs are consistent, it indicates that
Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

143

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

the O&M IP address is correct. Otherwise, it indicates that the IP address is incorrect. In
such a case, the M2000 prompts engineers to manually rectify the fault. The M2000
obtains the ESN of a NodeB in the following modes:

Engineers manually record the ESN and import it to the M2000.

The M2000 obtains the ESN from the NodeB through the OMCH.

This function applies only to RAN12.0.


During the whole NodeB deployment process, engineers can obtain the deployment report at
any time. The report records the information such as operation results and unsolved problems.

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R010:
Solution II of the remote and automatic commissioning, which is also referred to as
end-to-end NodeB deployment, is implemented.
The following function is added to M2000 V200R011C00:
Starting the VSWR test in the process of NodeB status monitoring and fault diagnosis

Dependency
The remote NodeB commissioning applies to the RAN11.0 and earlier releases.
The end-to-end NodeB deployment solution can be used for deploying NodeBs of the RAN12.0
and later versions or upgrading NodeBs of the RAN10.0 and RAN11.0 versions to the
RAN12.0 and later versions.

WOFD-280400 eNodeB Auto-Deployment LTE


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R008.

Summary
The M2000 provides an eNodeB deployment wizard, which implements eNodeB self detection,
eNodeB self configuration, and self RET commissioning according to the eNodeB deployment
list and deployment data.
The M2000 allows users to monitor the process of eNodeB deployment in real time. As a result,
users can learn about the progress, status, and execution reports of the deployment.
The M2000 provides an end-to-end automatic USU deployment solution. The M2000
automatically detects USUs based on the imported deployment list, configures the USUs, and
delivers commissioning licenses.

Benefits
The deployment wizard simplifies the eNodeB deployment and reduces human errors,
improving the efficiency of deploying eNodeBs. The M2000 works with NEs to implement
automatic eNodeB deployment in batches, reducing manual interventions, improving the
capability of network deployment.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

144

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Description
This feature applies to eNodeB deployment, capacity expansion, and reparenting. This feature
implements end-to-end eNodeB deployment. During the deployment, the M2000 automatically
monitors eNodeB status and performs health check, which simplifies manual operations.
The following preparations must be made before eNodeB deployment:
The target software version, commissioning license, and configuration data of the eNodeB
are uploaded to the M2000.
The transmission between the eNodeBs and the M2000 is proper.
Automatic eNodeB deployment involves the following procedures, which can be customized
based on application scenarios:
Automatic eNodeB detection and automatic IP address assignment
Operators import an eNodeB deployment list to the M2000. The list contains data required
for eNodeB deployment, such as eNodeB names, target version number, ESNs, and IP
addresses. Based on the list, the M2000 creates eNodeBs in a topology view. After
operators select target eNodeBs on the M2000 GUI and start deployment, the M2000
automatically checks whether the required data is available. If no exception occurs, the
M2000 automatically performs eNodeB deployment without human intervention.
The M2000 assigns IP addresses to the selected eNodeBs using DHCP and sets up
OMCHs to the eNodeBs. To simplify IP address planning, the M2000 provides an IP
address pool. Operators need to configure only a network segment for eNodeB IP
addresses. Then, the M2000 automatically assigns available IP addresses in the IP address
pool to eNodeBs.
Automatic eNodeB configuration
The M2000 instructs the eNodeBs to start software upgrade. Then, the eNodeBs
automatically download software and configuration data from the M2000, and perform
software upgrade and data loading.
Delivery of commissioning licenses
During initial eNodeB deployment, the M2000 cannot allocate commercial licenses to the
eNodeBs because network planning is uncertain. After the eNodeBs perform software
upgrade and data loading, the M2000 delivers commissioning licenses to the eNodeBs.
This ensures that the eNodeBs provide services properly before commercial licenses are
available.
Automatic RET commissioning
After the eNodeBs are configured, RETs must be commissioned to ensure proper cell
coverage. The M2000 integrates RET commissioning into eNodeB deployment, which is
automatically performed by the M2000. In this way, RET commissioning is automated and
manual interventions are reduced.
The M2000 instructs the eNodeBs to start RET commissioning. Then, the eNodeBs
automatically download software and configuration data from the M2000, and perform
software upgrade and data loading. The eNodeBs then calibrate the downtilts of the RETs.
eNodeB status monitoring
The M2000 checks installation and deployment quality and continuously monitors
eNodeB alarms and cell availability status. The M2000 starts an eNodeB health check
immediately after detecting an available cell. The health check items include eNodeB
hardware status, cell status, environment status, and data consistency. After confirming
that all the health check items in the check report pass the check, Operators need to
confirm that eNodeB deployment is complete. In addition, the M2000 allows users to view

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

145

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

alarm information based on object categories, such as cells, boards, and links. They can
also start antenna fault diagnosis based on problem locating requirements.
During the whole eNodeB deployment process, operators can obtain the deployment report at
any time. The report records the information such as operation results and unsolved problems.
In addition, the M2000 provides an end-to-end automatic USU deployment solution, reducing
manual operations and operation complexity.
USU deployment preparations are the same as those for eNodeBs. Automatic USU deployment
involves the following procedures:
Automatic USU detection
Operators import a USU deployment list to the M2000. The list contains data required for
USU deployment, such as USU names, target version number, and IP addresses. Based on
the list, the M2000 creates USUs in a topology view. After operators select target USUs on
the M2000 GUI and start deployment, the M2000 automatically checks whether the
required data is available. If no exception occurs, the M2000 automatically performs USU
deployment without manual intervention. The M2000 assigns IP addresses to the selected
USUs using DHCP and sets up OMCHs to the USUs.
Automatic USU configuration
The M2000 instructs the USUs to start software upgrade. Then, the USUs automatically
download software and configuration data from the M2000, and perform software upgrade
and data loading.
Delivery of commissioning licenses
After the USUs perform software upgrade and data loading during the USU deployment,
the M2000 delivers commissioning licenses to the USUs. This ensures that the USUs
provide services properly before commercial licenses are available.
During the whole USU deployment process, operators can obtain the deployment report at any
time. The report records the information such as operation results and unsolved problems.

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R012C01:
Automatic USU deployment
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R011C00:
eNodeB status monitoring
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R010:
Supporting the O&M IP pool function: After users set the network segment of the O&M IP
pool, the M2000 automatically assigns O&M IP addresses to eNodeBs.
Automatically commissioning license distribution and RET commissioning.

Dependency
None

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

146

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

WOFD-280700 BTS Auto-Deployment GBSS


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R010.

Summary
In addition to hardware installation, commissioning devices and services is an important step
during the deployment or upgrade of the GBTS. Both installation engineers and commissioning
engineers must work together to deploy or upgrade the GBTS. The M2000 provides the
automatic GBTS deployment feature. This feature significantly lowers the qualification
requirements for deployment engineers and reduces the workforce cost. Therefore, it improves
the automation of GBTS deployment and reduces manual errors.
By using this feature, GBTS deployment engineers need to complete only the hardware
installation on site by using this feature. The succeeding commissioning procedures such as
software upgrade, data configuration, and service verification are performed on the M2000.
Therefore, the whole GBTS deployment process is complete.

Benefits
This feature brings about the following benefits:
The time on GBTS deployment is reduced, while the deployment efficiency is improved.
The GBTS deployment cost is reduced.
The qualifications required for GBTS deployment engineers are lowered.
Users do not need to frequently enter the site.
The time for identifying and locating problems during GBTS deployment is shortened.
The possibility of manual errors is reduced.

Description
Before using the automatic GBTS deployment feature, engineers need to ensure that:
The target GBTS software is uploaded to the GBSC.
The connections between the GBTSs and the M2000 are proper.
Automatic GBTS deployment involves the following procedures:
Assigning GBTS IP addresses and setting up transmission channels
O&M personnel import a GBTS deployment list into the M2000. This list contains data
required for GBTS deployment, such as GBTS names, target software version, ESNs, and
IP addresses. After O&M personnel select target GBTSs on the M2000 GUI and start
deployment, the M2000 automatically checks whether the required data is available. If the
GBSC works as the DHCP server, GBTS IP addresses are assigned by the GBSC, and the
M2000 checks whether the OMCHs between GBTSs and the GBSC are working properly.
If the M2000 works as the DHCP server, the M2000 assigns GBTS IP addresses using
DHCP. Then, the GBTSs automatically set up OMCHs with the GBSC.
Before the deployment, users can select whether to enable manual intervention, such as
manually checking whether the transmission is normal. If manual intervention is not
selected, the deployment is performed automatically, and no manual intervention is
required.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

147

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Automatically configuring GBTS


The M2000 instructs the GBSC to start the GBTS software upgrade. The GBTS
downloads the software of the required version from the GBSC and upgrades the software.
The procedure of loading the GBTS configuration data is not controlled by the M2000.
Instead, the reset GBTS obtains the configuration data directly from the GBSC and loads
the data.
Monitoring GBTS status and diagnosing faults
The purposes of GBTS status monitoring are to check whether the service verification can
be performed during the GBTS deployment and to monitor the GBTS status during the
whole deployment process. Before service verification, the M2000 queries the alarms and
cell status, start the project quality check, and checks the availability status of cells. After
detecting available cells, the M2000 starts verifying services. In addition, the M2000
allows users to view alarm information based on object categories, such as cells, boards,
and links. Users can also start fault diagnosis for physical transmission ports and antennas
based on problem locating requirements.
Verifying services
At the service verification stage, the M2000 collects GBSC performance counters related
to the SDCCH, TCH, uplink GPRS, and downlink GPRS and then checks whether GBTS
services are normal based on the obtained performance counters. After verifying that the
GBTS services are normal, commissioning engineers confirm that the GBTS deployment
is complete. Then, the M2000 stops verifying GBTS services and monitoring GBTS
status.
In the preceding procedures, IP address assignment and automatic configuration can be locally
performed through USB flash drives or LMTs. However, the subsequent procedures such as
status monitoring and service verification must be performed by the M2000.
DHCP-based IP address assignment does not apply to GBTSs in ATM networking mode. In this
case, GBTS IP addresses are obtained from the GBSC using Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) or
configured using USB flash disks.
Users can customize GBTS deployment procedures based on application scenarios.
After the GBTS deployment is complete, the M2000 generates a deployment report. The report
records the information such as operation results and unsolved problems.

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R012C00:
The M2000 assigns IP addresses to GBTSs using DHCP.

Dependency
This feature applies to 3900 series GBTSs except BTS3900E and BTS3900B.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

148

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

2.13 SingleRAN Management


WOFD-071700 MBTS Management SingleRAN
Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R009.

Summary
As the solution to the base stations in the future mobile network, multimode base stations
(MBTSs) developed by Huawei can work in various RATs. The M2000 provides various MBTS
management functions to satisfy the requirements for centralized operation and maintenance.
MBTS management inherits the management functions of single-mode base stations and
existing O&M methods. It also provides centralized management functions for MBTS common
resources, simplifying common resource management.
Currently, the M2000 provides a RAT priority management view. The M2000 manages an
MBTS as a whole. Inventory and alarm information about MBTS common resources is
displayed on the side of the primary RAT. The M2000 provides MBTS topology, alarm,
power-saving, and inventory management, and MBTS upgrade functions to meet requirements
for maintaining the MBTS as a whole.

Benefits
Users can manage the MBTS as a whole by performing topology management, alarm
management, and software upgrade. In this way, the M2000 centrally manages MBTSs,
improving efficiency and reducing maintenance costs.

Description
Currently, MBTSs refer to dual-mode or tri-mode base stations. Dual-mode base stations are
MBTSs that support any two of GSM, LTE, and UMTS modes, for example, MBTS(GU),
MBTS(GL), and MBTS(UL). Tri-mode base stations are MBTSs that support the GSM, UMTS,
and LTE modes, which is MBTS(GUL). This feature takes the MTBS(GU) as an example to
describe the MBTS management feature. Unless otherwise specified, the MBTS(GL), the
MBTS(UL) and MBTS(GUL) support the same functions as the MBTS(GU).
When managing the MBTSs in priority-based mode, the M2000 provides the following MBTS
management functions:
MBTS configuration
The M2000 allows users to plan MBTS configuration. Users can plan MBTS deployment
data using the unified site deployment module of the CME. The parameter check function
of the CME ensures consistency of configuration parameters among MBTS common
resources. For details about how to configure MBTS data, see the features related to
SingleRAN in the sections about the CME in this document.
MBTS deployment
This function supports the individual deployment of each side of an MBTS and
deployment of the entire MBTS. During automatic deployment, the M2000 automatically
assigns MBTS IP addresses, upgrades the MBTS software, delivers MBTS configuration
data, and verifies services. This ensures quick and reliable MBTS deployment while

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

149

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

reducing deployment costs. For details about MBTS deployment, see the feature
WOFD-110500 MBTS Auto-Deployment SingleRAN.
MBTS topology management
The M2000 provides a dedicated topology management window for MBTS maintenance,
which:

Displays MBTSs on the entire network

Provides shortcut menus for maintaining an MBTS, such as viewing MBTS inventory
and alarm information, and its device panel

Allows users to quickly view cell status under MBTSs and perform shortcut operations
on the cells, such as activating and deactivating the cells

The M2000 checks multimode relationships and automatically binds MBTSs. It also
allows users to manually bind MBTSs based on planned data.
MBTS alarm management
The M2000 centrally queries alarms and collects statistics about the MBTS, which
facilitates alarm management by the MBTS as a whole.
MBTS common resources, such as power modules and fans, are shared by each side of an
MBTS. By default, if faults occur on these common components, alarms are
simultaneously reported from each side. To avoid redundant alarm reporting, the M2000
displays common alarms only on the side of the highest RAT priority. In addition, the
M2000 centrally queries alarms and collects alarm statistics based on MBTSs.
For the northbound alarm interface, the M2000 retains the existing mode for reporting
alarms from each side of an MBTS. In addition, it adds a function of masking common
alarms. As a result, a third-party system does not need to process redundant common
alarms.
MBTS software upgrade
The M2000 supports individual upgrades and rollbacks of each side of an MBTS. It also
supports upgrades and rollbacks of the entire MBTS. Upgrades and rollbacks of the entire
MBTS efficiently reduce MBTS service interruption duration.
MBTS power-saving management
This function allows users to query MBTS power consumption. Users can learn about the
power consumption and traffic volume of all base stations in an MBTS on a per hour basis.
In addition, network power-saving effects are compared in charts, so that users can adjust
power-saving policies based on the power consumption.
MBTS inventory management
Inventory information about MBTS common resources is reported repeatedly. To avoid
redundant reporting, the M2000 integrates inventory data by MBTS. In this scenario, users
maintain and manage inventory data of each MBTS. In addition, the M2000 allows users
to synchronize, query, import, and export MBTS inventory data.
For the northbound inventory interface, the M2000 exports inventory data by the entire
MBTS. As a result, a third-party system does no need to process redundant inventory data.
Export of the MBTS list
The M2000 provides MBTS configuration reports for users to quickly query each side of
an MBTS and associations between the sides. The reports contain MBTS names, base
station Full Distinguished Names (FDNs), MBTS capability, and local and peer base
station names, types, FDNs, and capability. Users can export the configuration reports as
XLS, CSV, TXT, and HTML files and print the reports.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

150

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R012C00:
Viewing the status of the cells under each MBTS and performing shortcut operations on
the cells
The following function is added to M2000 V200R011C01:
Topology management, alarm management, and MBTS list export for MBTS(WL)
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R011C00:
Power-saving management of the MBTS
Software upgrade of the MBTS(UL)
Topology management, alarm management, software upgrades, and inventory data
synchronization of the MBTS(GUL)
The following functions are added to M2000 V200R010:
Inventory data synchronization of the MBTS(GU), MBTS(GL), and MBTS(UL)
Topology management, alarm management, MBTS relationship management, inventory
management and export of the MBTS list of the MBTS(GL) and the MBTS(UL)
Software upgrade of the MBTS(GL)

Dependency
The MBTS inventory management must work with the features WOFD-160100 Inventory
Management.
The MBTS power-saving management must work with the features WOFD-200200 Base
Station Power-Saving Management LTE, WOFD-200600 Base Station Power-Saving
Management WRAN and WOFD-200500 Base Station Power-Saving Management GBSS.

WOFD-110200 MBTS Device Panel SingleRAN


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R009.

Summary
The M2000 provides a centralized MBTS panel. All the subracks and boards of the MBTS, and
their status and alarm information, are displayed on the same device panel. For instance, for an
MBTS(GU), the boards of the GBTS and the NodeB are displayed on the panel of the MBTS.
Users can run commands on the device panel to query the board status or to restart the boards.
The MBTS(GL), MBTS(UL) and MBTS(GUL) also support this function.

Benefits
This function centrally manages MBTSs. The display of the boards facilitates user maintenance
and improves the usability of the M2000.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

151

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Description
To monitor the real-time status of the MBTS, the M2000 provides panel management over the
MBTS. The MBTS is displayed as an entire device panel, containing the subracks and boards
on the MBTS. Panel management over the MBTS has the following functions:
Displaying the board status and alarm information on the device panel, and automatically
updating them. Users can learn the running status of a board based on the color of the
board status indicator, the indicators of active alarms on the board, and the fault scrolling
bar.
When faults occur on the board, the fault scrolling bar displays information about the
faulty board, including the rack number, subrack number, slot number, and the name of
boards. Users can choose to display or hide the fault scrolling bar.
Users can query the status of a board, restart a board, or query the board CPU usage by
selecting a board and choosing different options from the shortcut menu.
If an MBTS is configured with RRUs, the M2000 displays the physical topology
relationships between RRUs and between RRU and BBU ports by displaying the RRU
device panel, RRU chains, and CPRI connections. The M2000 automatically updates the
information to display the chain connection and device status on the chain in real time.

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R011C01:
Displaying the device panel of the MBTS(WL)
The following function is added to M2000 V200R011C00:
Displaying the device panel of the MBTS(GUL)
The following function is added to M2000 V200R010:
Displaying the device panel of the MBTS(GL)

Dependency
This feature applies to MBTS(GU) in SingleRAN3.0 and later versions.

WOFD-110400 MBTS Dynamic Power Sharing SingleRAN


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R010.

Summary
The GSM and UMTS carriers for the MBTS(GU) share one power amplifier. The power
sharing function can be enabled when the GSM and UMTS carriers share the same power
amplifier. This significantly improves the power usage and the quality of both the GSM and
UMTS networks in situations where the busy hours of GSM and UMTS fall on different time
segments or the traffic of GSM and UMTS is unbalanced.
The M2000 provides the MBTS dynamic power sharing feature, which allows users to monitor
power usage and power sharing of the MBTS(GU) on the GUI.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

152

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Benefits
This feature allows users to monitor the dynamic power usage and power sharing on the GUI
and to adjust power allocation according to the monitoring result.

Description
This feature provides the following functions:
Creating an MBTS(GU) power sharing task: Users can specify the NEs to be monitored,
the cabinet, subrack, and slot where the power amplifier to be monitored is located, and the
monitoring time range before task creation.
Starting an MBTS(GU) power sharing task: After an MBTS(GU) power sharing task is
started, the M2000 displays the power waveform chart in real time. The chart involves the
respective peak power and average power consumed by UMTS and GSM, total power
shared, power sharing duration, and total task execution duration.
Reviewing an MBTS(GU) power sharing task: Users can review a completed MBTS(GU)
power sharing task. The M2000 dynamically displays the power sharing information
during the task execution in chronological order. This helps users to check the history task
information.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
None

WOFD-110500 MBTS Auto-Deployment SingleRAN


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R010.

Summary
In addition to hardware installation, device and service commissioning is also important during
the deployment or upgrade of an MBTS. Installation and commissioning personnel must work
together to deploy or upgrade an MBTS. In this situation, the M2000 provides the MBTS
automatic deployment feature to achieve the following goals:
Lower the qualification requirements for deployment personnel
Reduce workforce costs
Improve the automation degree of MBTS deployment
Reduce errors caused by manual operations
By using this feature, MBTS deployment personnel only need to complete site hardware
installation. The succeeding commissioning procedures such as software upgrade, data
configuration, and service verification are performed on the M2000.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

153

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Benefits
This feature brings about the following benefits:
The MBTS deployment period is reduced and the deployment efficiency is improved.
The MBTS deployment costs are reduced.
The qualification requirements for MBTS deployment personnel are lowered.
Site maintenance is minimized.
The troubleshooting time during MBTS deployment is shortened.
Errors caused by manual operations are reduced.

Description
The MBTS auto-deployment feature applies to MBTS(GU), MBTS(GL), and MBTS(UL).
MBTS auto-deployment is classified into independent auto-deployment and simultaneous
auto-deployment. In the case of independent auto-deployment, the auto-deployment procedure
is the same as that for each RAT. In the case of simultaneous auto-deployment,
auto-deployment is also performed for individual RATs, and the automatic detection phase and
the automatic configuration and software upgrade phase of all RATs are synchronized. An
MBTS enters the next phase only after the previous phases of all RATs are complete.
Before enabling MBTS automatic deployment, personnel need to ensure the following:
The target software version of the MBTS is uploaded to the M2000 or the MBSC.
The transmission between the BTS, the M2000, and BSC is ready.
The phases of MBTS auto-deployment depend on those of the auto-deployment process of each
RAT, for example, automatic detection, automatic configuration and software upgrade, and
MBTS status monitoring. O&M personnel can customize the auto-deployment process.
After the deployment, the M2000 generates a deployment report, which contains task and
progress information about the MBTS deployment. Users can export the report.

Enhancement
The MBTS auto-deployment function for MBTS(GL) and MBTS(UL) is added to M2000
V200R011C00.

Dependency
This feature applies to MBTS(GU) in SingleRAN5.0 and later versions.

WOFD-031800 Base Station Co-Transmission Monitoring


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R011C00.

Summary
Huawei MBTS provides a co-transmission scheme for multiple RATs. The M2000 provides a
transmission monitoring window for the MBTS. This window displays transmission status

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

154

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

(indicated by traffic volume and packet loss ratio) and dynamic bandwidth sharing in real time.
It also displays the actual bandwidth usage of each RAT.

Benefits
Efficiently collecting statistics about bandwidth usage and reusing bandwidth helps telecom
operators about the transmission plan and verification, and reduce OPEX.
By viewing packet loss ratio, users can check the usage of transmission resources in time, and
try to improve network quality by expanding transmission capacity. This prevents network KPI
deterioration caused by insufficient transmission resources.

Description
Currently, The Base Station Co-Transmission Monitoring feature applies to MBTS(GU),
MBTS(GL), MBTS(UL), and MBTS(GUL).
The co-transmission scenarios supported by MBTS(GU) are as follows:
FE/GE cascade
FE/GE convergence
IP over E1 cascade
MBTS(GL), MBTS(UL), and MBTS(GUL) support FE/GE cascade scenarios and FE/GE
convergence scenarios.
The M2000 provides the management of co-transmission monitoring tasks. Users can create the
IP transmission monitoring task by setting objects and ports to be monitored, and setting the
networking mode.
The M2000 displays the co-transmission information about each base station in a chart or table.
The co-transmission information includes peak traffic, average traffic, peak packet loss ratio,
average packet loss ratio, total peak traffic, and total average traffic.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
None

WOFD-110600 Dynamic Spectrum Sharing


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R011C00.

Summary
The dynamic spectrum sharing feature is developed to meet the frequency refarming
requirements of telecom operators. Frequency refarming is a solution with which telecom
operators reuse their spectrum resources by adopting new radio telecommunications
technologies, improving spectrum efficiency and data throughput. GSM subscribers are
gradually evolving from to UMTS subscribers. Frequency refarming cannot be implemented
Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

155

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

during the transition period. To solve this problem, Huawei provides the dynamic spectrum
sharing feature for improving spectrum efficiency during the transition period. Using this
feature, the M2000 classifies the spectrum on a GSM network into basic spectrum and shared
spectrum. Shared spectrum can be dynamically switched between GSM and UMTS networks.

Benefits
This feature brings about the following benefits:
Costs on data services are reduced, while the spectrum resource usage is improved.
The coverage of mobile broadband data services and user satisfaction are improved.

Description
The M2000 allows users to create, modify, delete, start, and stop dynamic spectrum sharing
tasks. The following information can be defined in a dynamic spectrum sharing task:
Spectrum sharing areas.
A spectrum sharing area is served by one or several base stations or base station pairs.
Based on base station locations in the sharing areas and spectrum sharing modes, base
station coverage types are classified as normal, small, and Buffer Zone coverage.

Normal coverage: This coverage mode is used when the base station is in the center of
the spectrum sharing area, because there is no co-channel interference between shared
UMTS cells and neighboring GSM cells.

Small coverage: This coverage mode is used to reduce co-channel interference


between shared UMTS cells and neighboring GSM cells if the base station is on the
edge of the spectrum sharing area.

Buffer Zone coverage: This coverage mode is used to reduce co-channel interference
from GSM cells under the base stations to surrounding shared UMTS cells if no UMTS
cell exists in the spectrum sharing area.

Information about base station pairs can be imported to the M2000 using CSV files. Base
station pairs can also be selected on the M2000 GUI.
Spectrum sharing periods for different days in a week or specified times on special dates to
start or stop spectrum sharing.
Proportion of BTSs for reclaiming spectrum.
If the proportion of BTSs requiring spectrum reclaiming to the total number of BTSs
reaches a specified threshold in an area, reclaiming spectrum sharing is triggered.
After a dynamic spectrum sharing task is started, the M2000 sends task setting rules to the BSC.
Then, the BSC determines whether to start spectrum sharing based on the network load within a
specified period. If the BSC has started spectrum sharing, the M2000 instructs the RNC to start
spectrum sharing.
In non-Buffer Zone scenarios, the RNC activates cells and uses the spectrum shared by the
BSC to bear services.
In Buffer Zone scenarios, however, the RNC does not activate cells.
When a spectrum sharing period ends or the BSC determines to reclaim spectrum sharing based
on the network load, the M2000 will instruct the RNC to block shared UMTS cells. Users can
also manually share or reclaim spectrums. During dynamic spectrum sharing, the M2000
monitors the spectrum sharing status of GSM and UMTS.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

156

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Enhancement
None

Dependency
None

2.14 Network Planning and Optimization


WOFD-050800 Network Optimization Policy Management LTE
Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R009.

Summary
The M2000 provides the feature of managing network optimization policies. This feature
allows telecom operators to easily create network optimization policies, configure policy
parameters, and control policy switches, according to the actual network deployment situations
and optimization requirements. In addition, the M2000 provides network optimization logs for
users to check network optimization progress and results.

Benefits
The M2000 provides the function of managing network optimization policies so that users can
adopt a corresponding network optimization policy based on the actual network load.
The M2000 provides the function of viewing network optimization logs so that users can easily
monitor the optimization process and query optimization results.

Description
The M2000 provides the following network optimization policy management feature and
corresponding network optimization logs:
Network optimization policies

Mobility Robust Optimization (MRO) policy


By adjusting mobility parameters, the MRO algorithm can reduce abnormal handovers
and radio link failures (RLFs), ensuring smooth UE handovers. The M2000 provides
the function of setting MRO switches for eNodeBs, including intra- and
inter-frequency MRO switches and inter-RAT MRO switches (GERAN and UTRAN).

Inter-Cell Interference Co-ordination (ICIC) optimization policy


The ICIC technique reduces the inter-cell interference by coordinating allocation of
time and frequency domain resources and setting RF power. The M2000 provides
eNodeB ICIC optimization switches that are easy to control, such as the uplink switch
in the time domain, and uplink and downlink switches in the frequency domain.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Mobility Load Balancing (MLB) policy

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

157

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

The M2000 provides the functions of querying and configuring the MLB parameters of
eNodeBs.
The MLB policy applies to the following three scenarios: intra-frequency load
balancing, inter-frequency load balancing, and inter-RAT load balancing. Therefore,
the MLB parameters contain the switches and thresholds corresponding to these three
scenarios.
Self-organizing network (SON) logs
When a network optimization policy is applied, the key steps and results related to
network optimization are recorded into logs. The M2000 provides the functions of
querying and viewing network optimization logs and collecting log statistics. Users can set
various filter criteria or combined filter criteria when querying optimization logs.

Enhancement
The following function is added to M2000 V200R012C00:
Collecting SON log statistics
The MRO and MLB optimization policies are added to M2000 V200R010.

Dependency
Users can use the preceding network optimization policies only after they have purchased the
corresponding eNodeB features.

WOFD-050900 Automatic Planning of Micro eNodeBs LTE


Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R011C01.

Summary
Planning radio parameters for micro eNodeBs is difficult because a micro eNodeB covers a
small area and is frequently reparented or expanded. To solve this problem, the M2000 provides
the feature of automatically planning radio parameters for micro eNodeBs based on clusters.
This feature is based on cluster parameters and is used together with the plug-and-play function.
When enabled, the receiver on a micro eNodeB starts scanning neighboring cells and sends
scanning results to the M2000. Upon receiving the results, the M2000 identifies the cluster
where the micro eNodeB is located and generates radio cell parameters for the micro eNodeB
based on cluster planning parameters.

Benefits
Automatic parameter planning reduces site deployment time, manual operations, and project
construction costs. With this feature, micro eNodeBs are put into service shortly after they are
deployed.

Description
This feature is based on cluster parameters. A cluster indicates a scope defined by network
planning engineers based on macro cell locations. After a micro eNodeB is deployed, this
feature allows the micro eNodeB to obtain radio parameters and complete the parameter

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

158

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

configurations based on the micro eNodeB's location. Cluster parameters include the cluster
name, cluster location information, and cluster resource information. The cluster location
information is used for locating micro eNodeBs and is defined in a GSM macro cell list and a
UMTS macro cell list. The cluster resource information is used for allocating radio parameters
of micro eNodeBs in this cluster. These parameters include TAC, the value range of the PCIs
that can be allocated, RootSequenceIdx that can be allocated, and the frequency range. Cluster
parameters can be imported from and exported to CSV files.
In addition to setting cluster parameters, network planning engineers need to preset parameters
to be scanned by micro eNodeB's receivers. The scanning parameters contain the MCC and
MNC of neighboring GSM cells and frequencies of UMTS neighboring cells. After being
powered on, a micro eNodeB searches for its neighboring cells based on these parameters and
reports the neighboring cell information to the M2000. Then, the M2000 identifies the cluster
where the micro eNodeB is located based on the cluster location information. After computing
cell radio parameters using the automatic planning algorithm, the M2000 sends the parameters
to the micro eNodeB. These parameters include RootSequenceIdx, the frequency, PCI, TAC,
and neighboring cell list.
In the plug-and-play process, the micro eNodeB starts the automatic planning after upgrading
the software and downloading configuration files. The M2000 supports the monitoring of the
automatic planning process. With this function, users can view the status of the automatic
planning and export a report.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature is dependent on the feature LOFD-002016 Micro eNodeB Self-planning.

WOFD-051000 Automatic Micro NodeB Planning WRAN


Availability
This feature is introduced in M2000 V200R012C00.

Summary
Micro NodeBs have simple configuration and are used in small parts of coverage areas such as
hot spots and holes. Due to the characteristics of micro NodeBs, the M2000 automatically plans
their radio parameters based on certain rules and algorithms. Automatic planning of micro
NodeBs is performed during automatic deployment of micro NodeBs.
The following data of micro NodeBs can be automatically planned:
Frequencies and scrambling codes
Neighbor relationships
LACs, RACs, and SACs

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

159

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

Benefits
This feature, integrated into the automatic deployment of micro NodeBs, automatically plans
radio parameters of micro NodeBs. This simplifies micro NodeB planning, reduces planning
costs, and shortens micro NodeB deployment.

Description
The M2000 automatically plans frequencies, scrambling codes, neighbor relationships, LACs,
RACs, and SACs during automatic deployment of micro NodeBs.
Before starting automatic micro NodeB planning, users must provide reference data, including
available frequencies and scrambling codes of micro NodeBs, available frequencies of macro
NodeBs, and public land mobile network (PLMN) of GSM cells.
If users have selected the automatic planning procedure during automatic micro NodeB
deployment, the M2000 triggers the planning and sends a frequency scanning command to
micro NodeBs. Based on the frequency scanning results reported from micro NodeBs and
planned reference data entered by users, the M2000 plans frequencies, neighbor relationships,
scrambling codes, LACs, RACs, and SACs using the automatic radio parameter selection
algorithm. Then, the M2000 delivers the planning results to the micro NodeBs to complete the
automatic planning.
The principle for automatically planning frequencies and scrambling codes is as follows:
Micro NodeBs detect available frequencies and the scrambling code of each frequency. The
M2000 selects the frequency with the minimum received signal strength as the working
frequency for each micro NodeB. It then filters out the scrambling codes that meet the
requirements under this frequency and selects the most appropriate scrambling code as the
available scrambling code for the micro NodeB.
The principle for automatically planning neighbor relationships is as follows:
The receiver of each micro NodeB obtains the signal strength of each cell by searching for cells
and detecting scrambling codes. It then selects cells with the optimal signal strength quality and
configures these cells and the cells under the micro NodeB as bidirectional neighboring cells.
The principle for automatically planning LACs, RACs, and SACs is as follows:
In the scanning result of neighboring cells for a local cell, the M2000 selects the LAC and RAC
of the neighboring cell with the optimal signal quality as the LAC and RAC of the local cell.
The value of the SAC is the same as the local cell ID.
The M2000 monitors automatic micro NodeB planning. It allows users to view the automatic
planning progress, result, and report, and export the report as an HTML file.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
This feature applies to BTS3902E WCDMA and needs to collaborate with the automatic micro
NodeB planning on the RAN side.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

160

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

2.15 Wireless Auxiliary Networking Devices


WOFD-300200 Auxiliary Networking Devices Management
Availability
This feature was introduced in M2000 V200R009.

Summary
On mobile networks, various networking devices are used, such as routers, switches, and
firewalls. To implement centralized management of mobile devices and these auxiliary
networking devices, the M2000 provides the function of managing Huawei IP devices and NE
bearing servers that are frequently used in RANs and third-party devices such as the Wi-Fi,
DNS, and DHCP.

Benefits
This feature implements the management of the entire mobile network through only one
third-party system. It minimizes the investments on OSS devices and reduces the workload of
maintenance personnel, reducing the O&M cost of telecom operators.

Description
On mobile networks, networking devices provided by Huawei are used, such as routers,
switches, and firewalls. Traditionally, to manage these networking devices, the N2000 provided
by Huawei is used to manage the networking devices and the M2000 is used to manage mobile
network devices such as BTSs and BSCs. Therefore, at least two OSS products must be
deployed. The traditional management mode cannot implement the mutual network
management. In addition, it cannot minimize the investments of telecom operators when only a
few transmission devices are used. To solve these problems, the M2000 implements the basic
management of common networking devices such as routers, switches, and firewalls. It also
provides other functions such as alarm management, configuration browse, and topology
management.
Alarm Management
The M2000 centrally collects and displays the alarms of IP devices including S-series
switches, routers of NE08-series and AR46-series, Eudemon-series firewall, IPSec
Gateway, Wi-Fi device (Skyway Excel XL5810), and NE bearer servers on the network.
Users can mask, acknowledge, unacknowledge, clear, and collect the statistics of alarms.
Status Check of the Third-Party DHCP and DNS
The M2000 can check the running status of the devices that use third-party DHCP and
DNS on GSM, LTE and WCDMA networks. When the devices do not work properly, the
M2000 generates alarms.
Configuration Management
The M2000 can collect interface configuration data of IP devices. The data is displayed
through the Management Information Tree (MIT). In this way, user can centrally view the
interface configuration data of IP devices.
User can export the configuration data of a selected IP device on the GUI. The file is in
CSV or XML format.
Topology Management

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

161

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

The M2000 provides the centralized topology management function, through which users
can create, delete, and modify the topology objects of IP devices and other devices in the
topology view.

Creating topology objects


When creating objects, users need to set the properties of objects. The properties vary
according to objects. All the objects have two common properties, creation time and
last modified time. The system automatically records the two properties.
The M2000 can create the IP devices, and other devices such as DNS, DHCP, and
Wi-Fi device in batches in the topology view. Users can export the batch creation file
template of the corresponding NE from the M2000, edit the script files of batch
creation according to the template format, and perform batch NE creation by importing
the script files.

Configuration information labels


The M2000 displays the configuration information about IP devices, DNS, Wi-Fi, and
DHCP in the topology view.

Deleting topology objects


The M2000 allows users to delete one or multiple topology objects from the topology
view.

Log management
NE system logs record important events such as operation errors, faults, and attacks. These
logs help users analyze the operating status of NEs and perform troubleshooting. The
M2000 collects and stores system logs for IP devices and allows users to query, export,
and collect statistics about the logs. NE system logs can be exported as CSV and TXT files.
The database stores these logs for a maximum of 90 days. Users can change the period. If
the disk configuration for the M2000 is low or the space planned for the NE log database is
less, users may not be able to store the logs for 90 days. When the M2000 reaches the end
of the storage period or disk capacity limit, the M2000 automatically dumps NE system
logs to files.

Enhancement
None

Dependency
Only telecom operators who have purchased Huawei IP devices including S-series switches,
NE08-series routers, AR46-series routers, and Eudemon-series firewall, or who use the M2000
to manage the third-party DNS, DHC, and Skyway Excel XL5810 need to use this feature.
Users must purchase Huawei customization services if they require enhanced management for
DNS, DHCP, and Skyway Excel from Huawei.

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

162

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

3
3GPP

Acronyms and Abbreviations

3rd Generation Partnership Project

A
ACL

access control list

ALD

antenna line device

ATAE

Advanced Telecommunications Application Environment

C
CME

Configuration Management Express

CORBA

Common Object Request Broker Architecture

D
DST

daylight saving time

E
ESN

electronic serial number

eSAU

evolved service aware unit

F
FDN

Full Distinguished Name

FTP

File Transfer Protocol

G
GPS

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Global Positioning System

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

163

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

GSM

Global System for Mobile Communications

GUI

graphical user interface

H
HTTP

Hypertext Transfer Protocol

I
ICIC

inter-cell interference coordination

L
LDAP

Lightweight Directory Access Protocol

LTE

Long Term Evolution

M
MD5

message digest algorithm 5

MDT

Minimization of Drive-Tests

MLB

mobility load balancing

MML

man-machine language

MOCN

multioperator core network

MR

measurement report

MRO

mobility robust optimization

N
NTP

Network Time Protocol

O
O&M

operation and maintenance

OPEX

operating expense

OSMU

OSS self-maintenance unit

OSS

operations support system

P
PC

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

personal computer

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

164

iManager M2000 V200R012


Basic Feature Description

R
RAN

radio access network

RAT

radio access technology

RLF

radio link failure

S
SAIC

single antenna interference cancellation

SLS

multi-server load-sharing system

SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol

SNTP

Simple Network Time Protocol

SSH

Secure Shell

SSL

Secure Sockets Layer

SSO

single sign-on

T
TCP

Transmission Control Protocol

U
UDP

User Datagram Protocol

UMTS

Universal Mobile Telecommunications System

V
VPN

virtual private network

VSWR

voltage standing wave ratio

W
WCDMA

Issue 03 (2012-07-30)

Wideband Code Division Multiple Access

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

165

Anda mungkin juga menyukai